Replace "might misunderstand" statements in completed NT books

en_tn_42-MRK.tsv

@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ MRK	4	20	tdwj	translate-numbers	τριάκοντα…ἑξήκοντα…ἑκα
 MRK	4	21	zzw7		αὐτοῖς	1	And he was saying to them	Here, **to them** refers back to the Twelve and others around Jesus in verse [10](../mrk/04/10.md). Alternate translation: “to the Twelve and others with him”
 MRK	4	21	nn7e	figs-rquestion	μήτι ἔρχεται ὁ λύχνος ἵνα ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον τεθῇ, ἢ ὑπὸ τὴν κλίνην?	1	The lamp does not come in order to be put under a basket, or under the bed, does it?	Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You certainly do not bring a light inside the house to put it under a basket or under a bed!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	4	21	dkq7	figs-doublet	ἵνα ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον τεθῇ, ἢ ὑπὸ τὴν κλίνην	1		Mark mentions two household items here for the sake of emphasis. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases, as modeled by the UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-MRK	4	22	y5kn	figs-litotes	οὐ γάρ ἐστιν κρυπτὸν, ἐὰν μὴ ἵνα φανερωθῇ; οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν	1	For nothing is hidden except so that it might be revealed, and nothing secret has happened except so that it might come to exposure	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “For everything that is hidden will be made known, and everything that is secret will come out into the open” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+MRK	4	22	y5kn	figs-litotes	οὐ γάρ ἐστιν κρυπτὸν, ἐὰν μὴ ἵνα φανερωθῇ; οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν	1	For nothing is hidden except so that it might be revealed, and nothing secret has happened except so that it might come to exposure	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “For everything that is hidden will be made known, and everything that is secret will come out into the open” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 MRK	4	22	kc6k	figs-parallelism	οὐ…ἐστιν κρυπτὸν, ἐὰν μὴ ἵνα φανερωθῇ; οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν	1	nothing is hidden … and nothing secret has happened	These two phrases, **nothing is hidden** and **nothing secret has happened**, both have the same meaning. Jesus is emphasizing that everything that is secret will be made known. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Absolutely everything that is hidden will be revealed!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 MRK	4	23	k1a8		εἴ τις ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω	1	If anyone has ears to hear, let him hear	See how you translated this in [4:9](../04/09.md)
 MRK	4	24	r2r1		ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς	1	he was saying to them	See how you translated this phrase in [4:21](../04/21.md)
@@ -486,7 +486,7 @@ MRK	8	22	mx9q	figs-explicit	ἵνα αὐτοῦ ἅψηται	1	that he would t
 MRK	8	24	r6tk	figs-simile	βλέπω τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, ὅτι ὡς δένδρα ὁρῶ περιπατοῦντας	1	I see men who look like walking trees	The man sees people **walking** around, yet they are not clear to him. To the man, people just look like tall figures, so he compares them to **trees**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Yes, I see people! They are walking around, but I cannot see them clearly. They look like trees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 MRK	8	25	td9l	figs-activepassive	καὶ διέβλεψεν καὶ ἀπεκατέστη	1	and he looked intently and was restored	The phrase **was restored** can be written is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and Jesus restored the man’s sight, and then the man opened his eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	8	27	e4l3	figs-go	ἐξῆλθεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς καὶ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ εἰς τὰς κώμας	1	Connecting Statement:	Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples came out into the villages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-MRK	8	28	nn1f	figs-ellipsis	ἄλλοι…ἄλλοι	1	other … others	The two occurrences of **others** in this verse both refer to “other people.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “other people say you are … other people say you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	8	28	nn1f	figs-ellipsis	ἄλλοι…ἄλλοι	1	other … others	The two occurrences of **others** in this verse both refer to “other people.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “other people say you are … other people say you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	8	30	rgy8	figs-quotations	ἐπετίμησεν αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ λέγωσιν περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	he warned them that they might tell no one about him	If it would be more natural in your language, you could express **they might tell no one about him** as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “Jesus warned them, ‘Do not tell anyone that I am the Christ’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 MRK	8	31	d4dc		τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	the Son of Man	See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [2:10](../02/10.md).
 MRK	8	31	m32p	figs-activepassive	ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι ὑπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων καὶ τῶν ἀρχιερέων καὶ τῶν γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι, καὶ μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἀναστῆναι	1	to be rejected by the elders and the chief priests and the scribes, and to be killed, and to rise up after three days	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the elders and the chief priests and the scribes would reject him, and that men would kill him, and that after three days he would rise up from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -614,7 +614,7 @@ MRK	9	35	fkf6	figs-declarative	ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος καὶ
 MRK	9	35	jzl5	figs-metaphor	εἴ τις θέλει πρῶτος εἶναι, ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος	1	If anyone wants to be first, he will be last of all	Being **first** refers to people who are esteemed by others because of their social position, wealth, and privileges. Being **last** refers to people who are not esteemed by others, because they lack social position, wealth, and privileges. Jesus speaks of being the “most important” as being **first** and of being the “least important” as being **last**. If it would help your readers to understand what it means to be **first** and **last** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternately, you could express the meaning using plain language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	9	35	ioiu	figs-nominaladj	εἴ τις θέλει πρῶτος εἶναι, ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος	1		Jesus is using the adjective **first** as a noun in order to describe a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “If anyone wants to be most important in God’s sight, he should act as if he is the least important in God’s sight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 MRK	9	35	um58	translate-ordinal	πρῶτος	1		If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as **first**, you can express the meaning behind the word **first** in a way that would be natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-MRK	9	35	jqo3	figs-ellipsis	ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος καὶ πάντων διάκονος	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he will be last of all people and a servant of all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	9	35	jqo3	figs-ellipsis	ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος καὶ πάντων διάκονος	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he will be last of all people and a servant of all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	9	35	z9x2	figs-declarative	ἔσται…ἔσχατος	1		Jesus is using the future statement **he will be last** to give an instruction. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “he must be last” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 MRK	9	35	t526		πάντων…πάντων	1	of all … of all	Alternate translation: “of all people … of all people”
 MRK	9	36	qqcu	writing-pronouns	ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν	1		The pronoun **them** refers to the 12 disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “in the midst of his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -718,7 +718,7 @@ MRK	10	32	hq7y	figs-explicit	οἱ…ἀκολουθοῦντες	1	those who ar
 MRK	10	32	k1nn	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς δώδεκα	1		See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../3/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 MRK	10	33	pv4w	figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ	1	Behold	**Behold** is an exclamation word which Jesus is using to draw attention to the words that he says next. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
 MRK	10	33	qkq9	figs-exclusive	ἀναβαίνομεν	1		When Jesus says **we**, he is speaking of himself and the 12 disciples, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-MRK	10	33	s1hp	figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται τοῖς ἀρχιερεῦσιν καὶ γραμματεῦσιν, καὶ κατακρινοῦσιν αὐτὸν θανάτῳ, καὶ παραδώσουσιν αὐτὸν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	the Son of Man will be delivered	In speaking of himself as **the Son of Man**, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, will be delivered to the chief priests and the scribes, and they will condemn me to death and deliver me to the Gentiles” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person)
+MRK	10	33	s1hp	figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται τοῖς ἀρχιερεῦσιν καὶ γραμματεῦσιν, καὶ κατακρινοῦσιν αὐτὸν θανάτῳ, καὶ παραδώσουσιν αὐτὸν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	the Son of Man will be delivered	In speaking of himself as **the Son of Man**, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, will be delivered to the chief priests and the scribes, and they will condemn me to death and deliver me to the Gentiles” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person)
 MRK	10	33	ha2g	figs-activepassive	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται	1	the Son of Man will be delivered	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the meaning behind the phrase **will be handed over** by using an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they will deliver the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	10	33	ohsf	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ κατακρινοῦσιν αὐτὸν θανάτῳ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **death** by using a verbal form of this word, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	10	33	ils2		παραδώσουσιν αὐτὸν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	deliver him to the Gentiles	Alternate translation: “put him under the control of the Gentiles”
@@ -752,7 +752,7 @@ MRK	10	43	gfun	figs-declarative	ἔσται ὑμῶν διάκονος	1		Jesus
 MRK	10	44	e7sn	figs-metaphor	εἶναι πρῶτος	1	to be first	Here, **to be first** means being the most important. See how you translated **first** in [Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md). Alternate translation: “to be the most important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	10	44	qzo8	figs-declarative	ἔσται πάντων δοῦλος	1		Jesus is using the future statement **will be a slave of all** to give an instruction. See how you translated the phrase “will be” in [10:43](../10/43.md), where it occurs with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “must be a slave of all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 MRK	10	44	u5yb	figs-hyperbole	ἔσται…δοῦλος	1		Jesus speaks of being **a slave** to emphasize the great effort Jesus’ followers should make to serve others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows service, or you could clarify that Jesus is teaching that his followers must act in a way that is similar to slaves in their service to others. as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-MRK	10	45	ctta	figs-123person	καὶ γὰρ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person as modeled by the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person)
+MRK	10	45	ctta	figs-123person	καὶ γὰρ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person as modeled by the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person)
 MRK	10	45	pmk3	figs-go	οὐκ ἦλθεν	1		Your language may say “go” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “did not leave heaven and go to earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 MRK	10	45	a3fr	figs-activepassive	διακονηθῆναι	1	For even the Son of Man did not come to be served	The phrase **to be served** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have people serve him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	10	45	rik1		διακονηθῆναι, ἀλλὰ διακονῆσαι	1	to be served, but to serve	Alternate translation: “to be served by people, but to serve people”
@@ -823,7 +823,7 @@ MRK	11	15	ve56	figs-synecdoche	ἱερῷ	1	General Information:	See how you tra
 MRK	11	16	ohxg	figs-synecdoche	ἱεροῦ	1		See how you translated the word **temple** in [11:11](../11/11.md), where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 MRK	11	17	xrz2	figs-rquestion	οὐ γέγραπται, ὅτι ὁ οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν?	1	Is it not written, ‘My house will be called a house of prayer for all the nations’?	**Has it not been written** is a rhetorical question which Jesus is using to emphasize God’s purpose for the temple, as recorded in the Old Testament Scriptures. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Listen to me! You should have paid closer attention to the scripture which says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	11	17	dxwe	figs-quotesinquotes	οὐ γέγραπται, ὅτι ὁ οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν? ὑμεῖς δὲ ἐποιήσατε αὐτὸν σπήλαιον λῃστῶν	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “God says in the Scriptures that his temple would be a place of prayer for all nations, but you have made it a den of robbers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-MRK	11	17	t9x9	figs-activepassive	οὐ γέγραπται	1		If your readers would misunderstand the phrase **been written**, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who has done the action. Alternate translation: “Has God not said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MRK	11	17	t9x9	figs-activepassive	οὐ γέγραπται	1		If your readers might not understand the phrase **been written**, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who has done the action. Alternate translation: “Has God not said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	11	17	qeix	figs-metaphor	οἶκός μου	1		God, speaking through the prophet Isaiah, refers to his temple as his **house** because his presence is there. Alternate translation: “My temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	11	17	t1ho	figs-metaphor	οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1		God, speaking through the prophet Isaiah, refers to a place where people would pray as a **house of prayer**. Alternate translation: “will be called a place where people from all nations can pray to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	11	17	npdf	figs-activepassive	οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται	1		The phrase **will be called** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is probably best to say that people will call God’s temple a house of prayer, although it is also possible to say that God will call it that as well. Alternate translation: “People will call my house a house of prayer” or “Everyone will call my temple a house of prayer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -869,12 +869,12 @@ MRK	11	30	i5is	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	from men	Here, Jesus is
 MRK	11	30	fr1b		ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἦν ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	was it from heaven or from men	Alternate translation: “was it authorized by God or by men”
 MRK	11	30	mc8n	figs-yousingular	ἀποκρίθητέ μοι	1		In the original language in which Mark wrote this book, the word **Answer** is a command written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 MRK	11	31	s9vv	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν εἴπωμεν, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐρεῖ, διὰ τί οὖν οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ	1	If we would say, ‘From heaven,’	The Jewish leaders are describing a hypothetical situation. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose we say, ‘From heaven.’ Then he will ask, ‘Then why did you not believe him’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-MRK	11	31	e7j4	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐὰν εἴπωμεν, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐρεῖ, διὰ τί οὖν οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ	1		If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “If we say that John’s authority came from God, Jesus will ask us why we did not believe him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+MRK	11	31	e7j4	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐὰν εἴπωμεν, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐρεῖ, διὰ τί οὖν οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “If we say that John’s authority came from God, Jesus will ask us why we did not believe him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 MRK	11	31	nu1m	figs-metonymy	ἐξ οὐρανοῦ	1	From heaven	See how you translated **heaven** in [11:30](../11/30.md). Alternate translation: “From God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	11	32	tczm	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1		Here, the Jewish leaders are describing another hypothetical situation. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “But suppose we say, ‘From men’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
 MRK	11	32	aus1	figs-explicit	ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	But we might say, ‘From men,’	The phrase **From men** refers to the source of the baptism of John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But if we say, ‘John’s baptism was from men,’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	11	32	v2gs	figs-gendernotations	ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	From men	See how you translated the phrase **From men** in [11:30](../11/30.md). Alternate translation: “From people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-MRK	11	32	b5qb	figs-quotesinquotes	ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	But we might say, ‘From men,’…	If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But if we say that John’s authority came from people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+MRK	11	32	b5qb	figs-quotesinquotes	ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	But we might say, ‘From men,’…	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But if we say that John’s authority came from people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 MRK	11	32	z93u	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων?	1	But we might say, ‘From men,’…	The religious leaders do not finish their statement, since they all understand what would happen if they said John’s baptism was not from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “But if we say, ‘From men,’ that would not be good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	11	32	z998	grammar-connect-time-background	ἐφοβοῦντο τὸν ὄχλον, ἅπαντες γὰρ εἶχον τὸν Ἰωάννην, ὄντως ὅτι προφήτης ἦν	1	They were afraid of the crowd	The author of the Gospel of Mark is providing this background information to help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “They said this to each other because they were afraid of the crowd, for all the people in the crowd believed that John really was a prophet” or “They did not want to say that John’s baptism was from men because they were afraid of the crowd, since all the people in the crowd believed that John truly was a prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
 MRK	11	32	dqlt	grammar-collectivenouns	ἐφοβοῦντο τὸν ὄχλον	1		The word **crowd** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “They were afraid of the group of people gathered there” or “They were afraid of the many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
@@ -958,10 +958,10 @@ MRK	12	21	cgzm	figs-metaphor	σπέρμα	1		See how you translated this sense o
 MRK	12	21	tbzw	figs-explicit	καὶ ὁ τρίτος ὡσαύτως	1		The Sadducees are speaking in a compact way in order to keep the story short. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the information they leave out from the context. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “In the same way, the third brother married this widow but also died before they had any children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	12	21	l1ds	figs-nominaladj	ὁ τρίτος	1	the third likewise	Jesus is using the adjective **third** as a noun in order to indicate a particular person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify the person. Alternate translation: “the third brother” or “the next oldest brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 MRK	12	21	hx1q	translate-ordinal	ὁ τρίτος	1		If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “brother number three” or “the next oldest brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-MRK	12	22	wjq8	figs-ellipsis	οἱ ἑπτὰ	1	the seven	The Sadducees are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the seven brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	12	22	wjq8	figs-ellipsis	οἱ ἑπτὰ	1	the seven	The Sadducees are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the seven brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	12	22	l3dg	figs-metaphor	σπέρμα	1	the seven did not leave offspring	See how you translated this sense of the word **seed** in [12:19](../12/19.md).. Alternate translation: “descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	12	23	w4wu		ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει	1	In the resurrection, when they may rise again, of which of them will she be a wife?	The Sadducees did not actually believe that there would be a resurrection. Your language may have a way of showing this. Alternate translation: “in the supposed resurrection” or “when people supposedly rise from the dead”
-MRK	12	23	c4p5	figs-ellipsis	οἱ…ἑπτὰ	1		The Sadducees are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the seven brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	12	23	c4p5	figs-ellipsis	οἱ…ἑπτὰ	1		The Sadducees are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the seven brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	12	24	zp2p	figs-rquestion	οὐ διὰ τοῦτο πλανᾶσθε, μὴ εἰδότες τὰς Γραφὰς, μηδὲ τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ?	1	Are you not being led astray because of this, not knowing the scriptures nor the power of God?	Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the fact that the Sadducees do not correctly understand the Scriptures or God’s power. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are greatly misunderstanding this matter because you do not know the Scriptures or the power of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 MRK	12	24	sie3	figs-activepassive	οὐ διὰ τοῦτο πλανᾶσθε, μὴ εἰδότες τὰς Γραφὰς, μηδὲ τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You are greatly mistaken because you do not know the Scriptures or God’s power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	12	24	i8il		τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the power of God	Alternate translation: “how powerful God is”
@@ -997,16 +997,16 @@ MRK	12	30	m8hi		ἐξ…ἐξ…ἐξ…ἐξ	1		Alternate translation: “with
 MRK	12	30	x3n5	figs-abstractnouns	ψυχῆς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **soul**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “essence” or “being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	12	30	ln0t	figs-abstractnouns	διανοίας	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **mind**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	12	30	mii2	figs-abstractnouns	ἰσχύος	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **strength**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “power” or “ability” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-MRK	12	31	eu8b	figs-ellipsis	δευτέρα αὕτη	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “The second commandment is this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	12	31	eu8b	figs-ellipsis	δευτέρα αὕτη	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “The second commandment is this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	12	31	fz8g	figs-explicit	δευτέρα	1		Here, Jesus is using the word **second** to mean “second most important.” If your readers would not understand the use of **second** in this context, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “The second most important commandment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	12	31	oegh	translate-ordinal	δευτέρα	1		If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as **second**, you can express the meaning behind the word **second** in a way that would be natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-MRK	12	31	np4y	figs-ellipsis	ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “You will love your neighbor as you love yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	12	31	np4y	figs-ellipsis	ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “You will love your neighbor as you love yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	12	31	tp6p	figs-declarative	ἀγαπήσεις	1	You will love your neighbor as yourself	Here, Jesus is quoting a scripture in which a future statement is used to give an instruction. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 MRK	12	31	pyc1	figs-explicit	τούτων	1	than these	Here, the word **these** refers to the two commandments that Jesus has just quoted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	12	32	uhgy		Διδάσκαλε	1		See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../4/38.md).
 MRK	12	32	qqm4	figs-abstractnouns	ἀληθείας	1	Good, Teacher	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you can express the same idea in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	12	32	awe3		εἷς ἐστιν	1	he is one	See how you translated the phrase **is one** in [12:29](../12/29.md).
-MRK	12	32	as2j	figs-ellipsis	οὐκ ἔστιν ἄλλος	1	that there is no other	The scribe is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “that there is no other god” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	12	32	as2j	figs-ellipsis	οὐκ ἔστιν ἄλλος	1	that there is no other	The scribe is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “that there is no other god” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	12	33	v8yn	figs-metaphor	ὅλης τῆς καρδίας	1		See how you translated the phrase **whole heart** in [12:30](../12/30.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	12	33	xnq9	figs-abstractnouns	συνέσεως	1	from your whole heart … from your whole understanding … from your whole strength	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **understanding**, you can express the same idea in another way, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 MRK	12	33	k42a	figs-abstractnouns	ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος	1	from your whole heart	See how you translated the phrase **whole strength** in [12:30](../12/30.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -1021,7 +1021,7 @@ MRK	12	35	ptc8	figs-synecdoche	ἱερῷ	1	answering, Jesus, teaching in the te
 MRK	12	35	q6e4		πῶς λέγουσιν οἱ γραμματεῖς ὅτι ὁ Χριστὸς, υἱὸς Δαυείδ ἐστιν?	1	How do the scribes say that the Christ is the son of David?	This is not a rhetorical question. Rather, Jesus’ listeners had asked him some difficult questions, and they had admitted that he answered them well. Now, in return, he is asking them a difficult question. None of them will be able to answer it, and this will demonstrate his wisdom even further. His question actually will teach something to those who are able to recognize its implications. But it would be appropriate to leave it in question form and not translate it as a statement.
 MRK	12	35	i6a4	figs-metaphor	υἱὸς Δαυείδ	1	the son of David	Here, Jesus is using the term **son** to mean “descendant.” If your readers would not understand what **son** means in this context, you could express its meaning using plain language. Alternate translation: “a descendant of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	12	36	e1zq	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ	1	David himself	Jesus uses the word **himself** here to emphasize that it was David, the very person whom the scribes call the father of the Christ, who spoke the words in the quotation that follows. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “None other than David” or “David, the very person whom you call the father of the Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
-MRK	12	36	jlbd	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ ἁγίῳ, εἶπεν ὁ Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου, ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν σου	1		If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation and then another quotation within that one. Alternate translation: “said, by inspiration of the Holy Spirit, that the Lord told his Lord to sit at his right side until he made his enemies a footstool for his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+MRK	12	36	jlbd	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ ἁγίῳ, εἶπεν ὁ Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου, ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν σου	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation and then another quotation within that one. Alternate translation: “said, by inspiration of the Holy Spirit, that the Lord told his Lord to sit at his right side until he made his enemies a footstool for his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 MRK	12	36	ejy2		ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ ἁγίῳ	1	in the Holy Spirit	Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” or “by the inspiration of the Holy Spirit”
 MRK	12	36	dv7b	figs-euphemism	εἶπεν ὁ Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου	1	said, ‘The Lord said to my Lord	Here, the term **Lord** does not refer to the same person in both instances. The first instance is representing the name Yahweh, which David actually uses in this psalm. In order to honor the commandment not to misuse God’s name, Jewish people often avoided saying that name and said Lord instead. The second instance is the regular term for “lord” or “master.” The ULT and UST capitalize the word because it refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “The Lord God said to my Lord” or “God said to my Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 MRK	12	36	v53p	translate-symaction	κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	Sit at my right hand	The seat at the right side of a ruler was a position of great honor and authority. By telling the Messiah to sit there, God was symbolically conferring honor and authority on him. Alternate translation: “Sit in the place of honor beside me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
@@ -1050,7 +1050,7 @@ MRK	12	41	nohd	writing-newevent	καθίσας κατέναντι τοῦ γαζ
 MRK	12	41	p2kp	figs-metonymy	τοῦ γαζοφυλακίου…τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον	1	the temple offering box	Mark is speaking of the boxes in the temple courtyard where people put money that they were giving to God. He associates the boxes with **the treasury**, the name of the place where this money would be kept until it was needed. Alternate translation: “the offering boxes … the offering boxes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	12	41	w4xc	grammar-collectivenouns	ὁ ὄχλος	1		The word **crowd** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression such as “many people,” as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 MRK	12	41	jgkw	figs-nominaladj	πλούσιοι	1		Mark is using the adjective **rich** as a noun in order to indicate a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression such as “rich people,” as the UST does. Alternate translation: “wealthy people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-MRK	12	41	rl1l	figs-ellipsis	πολλά	1		Mark is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “much money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	12	41	rl1l	figs-ellipsis	πολλά	1		Mark is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “much money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	12	42	g6ry	translate-bmoney	λεπτὰ δύο, ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης	1	two mites	The word lepta is the plural of “lepton.” A lepton was a small bronze or copper coin used by the Jews. It was equivalent to a few minutes’ wages. It was the least valuable coin that people used in this culture. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead, you might use the name of the least valuable coin in your culture, or use a general expression. Alternate translation: “two pennies” or “two small coins of little value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
 MRK	12	42	n29e	translate-bmoney	ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης	1	are a quadrans	A **quadrans** was the smallest Roman coin. Mark is seeking to help his readers, who are Roman, understand the value of **two leptas** in their own currency. You could clarify in your translation that a **quadrans** is a Roman coin, as the UST does, or you can leave this information untranslated. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
 MRK	12	43	ipl1	translate-versebridge		0	General Information:	In verse 43 Jesus says that the widow put more money in the offering than the rich people put in, and in verse 44 he gives his reason for saying that. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by moving this verse to the end of the following verse. You would then present the combined verses as 43–44, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
@@ -1081,7 +1081,7 @@ MRK	13	6	wv12	figs-explicit	ἐγώ εἰμι	1	they will lead many astray	The i
 MRK	13	7	fl5h		πολέμους καὶ ἀκοὰς πολέμων	1	you may hear of wars and rumors of wars	The phrase “wars and rumors of wars” could mean: (1) reports of wars that are currently happening and reports of wars that might happen in the future. (2) reports of wars that are already taking place near by and reports of wars that are happening in distant places. Alternate translation: “reports of wars that are close by and of wars that are far away”
 MRK	13	7	d1k9	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ οὔπω τὸ τέλος	1	but the end is not yet	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but the end will not happen immediately” or “but the end will not happen until later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	13	7	mi4d	figs-explicit	τὸ τέλος	1	the end	Here, **the end** implicitly means “the end of the world.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as the UST models. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	13	8	ydrb	figs-parallelism	ἐγερθήσεται…ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος, καὶ βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν	1		These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Jesus is likely using repetition for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could combine these two phrases into one phrase. Alternate translation: “Different groups of people will attack each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+MRK	13	8	ydrb	figs-parallelism	ἐγερθήσεται…ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος, καὶ βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν	1		These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Jesus is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these two phrases into one phrase. Alternate translation: “Different groups of people will attack each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 MRK	13	8	rlxf	figs-genericnoun	ἐγερθήσεται…ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος	1		The word **nation** represents nations in general, not one particular nation. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 MRK	13	8	oyrd	figs-metonymy	ἐγερθήσεται…ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος	1		The term **nation** refers to the people of one nationality or ethnic group. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	13	8	xln4	figs-idiom	ἐγερθήσεται…ἐπ’	1	will rise against	The phrase **rise against** is an idiom that means to attack. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1107,7 +1107,7 @@ MRK	13	11	uy91	figs-idiom	παραδιδόντες	1	handing you over	Here, **ha
 MRK	13	11	m0xq	figs-activepassive	δοθῇ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus says later in this verse that it is the Holy Spirit who will give the disciples the words to say. Alternate translation: “whatever the Holy Spirit gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	13	11	nr2r	figs-idiom	ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ	1		Jesus is using the term **hour** to refer to a specific time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning in plain language, as the UST models. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	13	11	q2o3	figs-explicit	οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑμεῖς οἱ λαλοῦντες, ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον	1		The phrase **for you will not be the ones speaking, but the Holy Spirit** implicitly means that it is the Holy Spirit who will give the disciples the words to say. This does not mean that the Holy Spirit audibly speaks for the disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the Holy Spirit will give you the words to say” or “for the Holy Spirit will instruct you what to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-MRK	13	11	a9b6	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον	1	but the Holy Spirit	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but the Holy Spirit will speak through you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	13	11	a9b6	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον	1	but the Holy Spirit	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but the Holy Spirit will speak through you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	13	12	toqp	figs-explicit	παραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν εἰς θάνατον, καὶ πατὴρ τέκνον; καὶ ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς καὶ θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς	1		Here, the implication is that these people will do these bad things to their family members, because these people hate Jesus, but their family members believe in him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because people hate me, they will deliver their own family members who believe in me to the authorities in order to have them killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	13	12	py9u	figs-explicit	παραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν εἰς θάνατον, καὶ πατὴρ τέκνον; καὶ ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς	1	brother will deliver brother to death	Here, Jesus is explaining to his disciples what “some” brothers and “some” fathers and “some” children will do to their family members. He is speaking in general terms and is not saying that “all” brothers or fathers or children will do this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	13	12	m6iq	figs-gendernotations	παραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν	1		Although the term **brother** is masculine, Jesus is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters will deliver their siblings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
@@ -1146,7 +1146,7 @@ MRK	13	20	fz5f	figs-doublet	τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς, οὓς ἐξελέ
 MRK	13	20	af7n	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς	1		Jesus is using the adjective **elect** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase as modeled by the UST.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 MRK	13	21	d9gr	translate-versebridge		0	General Information:	In verse 21 Jesus gives a command, and in verse 22 he gives the reason for the command. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by moving this verse to the end of the following verse. You would then present the combined verses as 21–22 as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
 MRK	13	21	qsfu	figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ τότε ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ, ἴδε, ὧδε ὁ Χριστός, ἴδε, ἐκεῖ, μὴ πιστεύετε	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “And do not believe anyone who says to you that the Christ is either here or there” or “And do not believe anyone who says to you that the Christ is in this location or that location” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-MRK	13	21	yfd3	figs-ellipsis	ἴδε, ἐκεῖ	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Look, there is the Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	13	21	yfd3	figs-ellipsis	ἴδε, ἐκεῖ	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Look, there is the Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	13	22	yw81	figs-activepassive	ἐγερθήσονται	1	to deceive	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “will arise” or “will come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	13	22	n81i	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς ἐκλεκτούς	1	false Christs	See how you translated the phrase **the elect** in [13:20](../13/20.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 MRK	13	23	jq8p	figs-metaphor	βλέπετε	1	But you, watch out	See how you translated the word **watch** in [13:9](../13/09.md) where it is used with a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “pay attention to yourselves” or “be watchful” or “be alert” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1161,7 +1161,7 @@ MRK	13	25	hge7	figs-parallelism	αἱ δυνάμεις	1	the powers that are in
 MRK	13	25	au6l	figs-activepassive	αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς σαλευθήσονται	1	the powers that are in the heavens will be shaken	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that it is “God” who will do it. Alternate translation: “God will cause the powers that are in the heavens to be shaken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	13	26	kl95	writing-pronouns	τότε ὄψονται	1	then they will see	The pronoun **they** refers to the people of the nations. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “then the people of the nations will see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MRK	13	26	yn52		τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [2:10](../02/10.md).
-MRK	13	26	a130	figs-123person	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		By calling himself **the Son of Man**, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+MRK	13	26	a130	figs-123person	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		By calling himself **the Son of Man**, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 MRK	13	26	nlo7	figs-explicit	ἐρχόμενον ἐν νεφέλαις	1		Jesus assumes that his disciples will know that the phrase **coming in clouds** means **coming** down from heaven **in clouds**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “coming down from heaven in clouds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	13	26	cd1e	figs-hendiadys	μετὰ δυνάμεως πολλῆς καὶ δόξης	1		The phrase **with great power and glory** expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The term **glory** describes what kind of **power** Jesus will have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “with very glorious power” or “shining brightly because he is so powerful” or, if you decided to use the first person, “with majesty and splendor” or “with awesome might and supreme honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 MRK	13	26	h4z1	figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ δυνάμεως πολλῆς καὶ δόξης	1	with great power and glory	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **power** or **glory**, you can express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **power** and **glory** with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “to show he is very powerful and everyone should praise him” or, if you decided to use the first person, “to show I am very powerful and everyone should praise me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -1301,7 +1301,7 @@ MRK	14	27	pu4s		λέγει αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰησοῦς	1	Jesus says to the
 MRK	14	27	lty4	figs-idiom	πάντες σκανδαλισθήσεσθε	1	will fall away	Here, **fall away** is an idiom meaning “to desert.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “You will all leave me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	14	27	gkb5	writing-quotations	γέγραπται	1		Here, Mark uses **it is written** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament passage of Scripture, ([Zechariah 13:7](../zec/13/07.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Mark is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it is written in God’s Word” or “it is written by Zechariah the prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 MRK	14	27	jp51	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form, as modeled by the UST, or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “Zechariah” did it. Alternate translation: “regarding what would happen to the Messiah and his followers, Zechariah wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MRK	14	27	qzzv	figs-quotesinquotes	ὅτι γέγραπται, πατάξω τὸν ποιμένα καὶ τὰ πρόβατα διασκορπισθήσονται	1		If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “because Zechariah the prophet wrote that God would strike the shepherd and the sheep would be scattered” or “because Zechariah the prophet predicted in the Scriptures that God would strike the shepherd and the sheep would be scattered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+MRK	14	27	qzzv	figs-quotesinquotes	ὅτι γέγραπται, πατάξω τὸν ποιμένα καὶ τὰ πρόβατα διασκορπισθήσονται	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “because Zechariah the prophet wrote that God would strike the shepherd and the sheep would be scattered” or “because Zechariah the prophet predicted in the Scriptures that God would strike the shepherd and the sheep would be scattered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 MRK	14	27	cv7z	figs-metaphor	πατάξω τὸν ποιμένα καὶ τὰ πρόβατα διασκορπισθήσονται	1		Jesus is quoting a prophecy from from ([Zechariah 13:7](../zec/13/07.md)) in which the prophet Zechariah speaks of the Messiah as if he were a **shepherd** and of the Messiah’s followers as if they were **sheep**. Since this is a quotation from Scripture, translate the words directly rather than providing an explanation of them, even if your language does not customarily use such figures of speech. If you want to explain the meaning of the metaphor, we recommend that you do that in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 MRK	14	27	w2az	figs-activepassive	τὰ πρόβατα διασκορπισθήσονται	1	the sheep will be scattered	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea behind the phrase **the sheep will be scattered** in another way that is natural in your language. The phrase **the sheep will be scattered** does not necessarily imply that there is someone making the action of scattering happen, so try to translate this phrase in a way that simply shows that **the sheep will be scattered** without saying who will make the action happen. Alternate translation: “the sheep will run away in different directions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 MRK	14	28	dm1q	figs-explicit	ἐγερθῆναί με	1	I am raised up	The phrase **raised up** means to having become alive again after having died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am made alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1316,7 +1316,7 @@ MRK	14	32	deg7	writing-pronouns	ἔρχονται	1	they come to a place	The pro
 MRK	14	32	ni66	figs-go	ἔρχονται	1	Connecting Statement:	Your language may say “went” rather than **come** or “came” in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went” or “they go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 MRK	14	34	eyw3	figs-synecdoche	ἐστιν ἡ ψυχή μου	1	My soul is	By using the phrase **my soul**, Jesus is speaking of his entire self by referring to one part of himself, his **soul**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 MRK	14	34	krj1	figs-abstractnouns	ψυχή μου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **soul**, you can express the same idea in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-MRK	14	34	ic1g	figs-hyperbole	ἕως θανάτου	1	even to the point of death	Jesus is using the phrase **even unto death** to describe the extent of his grief. Jesus is exaggerating in order to show the depth of the distress and sorrow that he feels. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses great sorrow, or you could turn the phrase **even unto death** into a simile, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “and I have so much grief that it makes me feel like I am near death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+MRK	14	34	ic1g	figs-hyperbole	ἕως θανάτου	1	even to the point of death	Jesus is using the phrase **even unto death** to describe the extent of his grief. Jesus is exaggerating in order to show the depth of the distress and sorrow that he feels. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses great sorrow, or you could turn the phrase **even unto death** into a simile, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “and I have so much grief that it makes me feel like I am near death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 MRK	14	35	nk8l	figs-explicit	εἰ δυνατόν ἐστιν	1	if it is possible	Alternate translation: “if possible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	14	35	wc6d	figs-idiom	παρέλθῃ…ἡ ὥρα	1	the hour might pass	Jesus is using the term **hour** to refer to a specific time at which an event or events would take place. Here, the phrase **the hour** refers specifically to the time of Jesus’ suffering. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning in plain language, as the UST models. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 MRK	14	35	gj74	figs-metonymy	παρέλθῃ ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ ἡ ὥρα	1		Here, Jesus is referring to the events that would take place during the upcoming hours as if they were the **hour** itself. Because Jesus is associating the upcoming events with the time of the events themselves, by asking that **the hour might pass**, Jesus is actually asking that the events themselves would not happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “the upcoming events would pass from him” or “he would not have to experience the upcoming things which he knew he was going to have to suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1330,7 +1330,7 @@ MRK	14	38	hi36	figs-abstractnouns	προσεύχεσθε, ἵνα μὴ ἔλθ
 MRK	14	38	zrp4	figs-explicit	προσεύχεσθε, ἵνα μὴ ἔλθητε εἰς πειρασμόν	1	so that you may not enter into temptation	The implications are that the disciples will soon experience the **temptation** to abandon Jesus in order to save themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “pray that when the Jewish leaders come to arrest me and you are tempted to try to save yourselves by running away or denying that you know me, you will not sin by doing that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MRK	14	38	c1je	figs-metonymy	τὸ…πνεῦμα	1	The spirit … the flesh	Jesus is describing the inner part of a person (which includes their desires and will) by association with their **spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. See how you translated **spirit** in [2:8](../02/08.md), where **spirit** is used with a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “The inner self” or “The inner person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 MRK	14	38	djxc	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ…πνεῦμα	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **spirit**, you can express the same idea in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-MRK	14	38	gt2n	figs-ellipsis	πρόθυμον	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “is willing to do what is right” or “is willing to do what pleases God” or “is willing to obey me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+MRK	14	38	gt2n	figs-ellipsis	πρόθυμον	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “is willing to do what is right” or “is willing to do what pleases God” or “is willing to obey me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 MRK	14	38	b909		ἡ…σὰρξ ἀσθενής	1		Here, the word **flesh** could: (1) include the meaning of both option 2 and option 3 and therefore **flesh** would refer to both the weakness of the human body and also to the deficiency of human desire and ability to do what is right. Alternate translation: “the body and your spiritual strength is weak” (2) refer to the human “body.” Alternate translation: “the body is weak” (3) refer to the sinful part of human nature that prefers to seek comfort and seek what it desires rather than obey God and do the things that please him. Alternate translation: “the sinful human nature is weak”
 MRK	14	39	l9nj		τὸν αὐτὸν λόγον εἰπών	1	having said the same thing	Alternate translation: “and said the same thing he had prayed the first time”
 MRK	14	40	zkb2	grammar-connect-logic-result	εὗρεν αὐτοὺς καθεύδοντας, ἦσαν γὰρ αὐτῶν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ καταβαρυνόμενοι	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because the three disciples’ eyes were weighed down, he found them sleeping” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])

en_tn_43-LUK.tsv

@@ -1869,7 +1869,7 @@ LUK	11	12	r52w	figs-rquestion	ἢ καὶ αἰτήσει ᾠόν, ἐπιδώσ
 LUK	11	12	l658	figs-hypo	ἢ καὶ αἰτήσει ᾠόν, ἐπιδώσει αὐτῷ σκορπίον?	1	Or also he will ask for an egg, he will give him a scorpion?	Jesus is also using a hypothetical situation to teach. You could translate his words that way. Alternate translation: “Or suppose a son asked for an egg to eat. His father would not give him a scorpion instead.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 LUK	11	12	e8hr	translate-unknown	σκορπίον	1	scorpion	A **scorpion** is a small animal related to the spider. It has two claws and a poisonous stinger in its tail. If your readers would not be familiar with scorpions, you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a poisonous stinging animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	11	12	ls05	figs-explicit	σκορπίον	1	a scorpion	In this culture, people did not eat scorpions. So Jesus is saying that a father would not give a son something the son could not eat if the son asked for something that he could eat. If people do eat scorpions in your culture, you could use the name of something that they do not eat, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “something he cannot eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	11	13	g99r	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ…ὑμεῖς πονηροὶ ὑπάρχοντες, οἴδατε	1	if you who are evil know	Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you who are evil know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+LUK	11	13	g99r	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ…ὑμεῖς πονηροὶ ὑπάρχοντες, οἴδατε	1	if you who are evil know	Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you who are evil know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 LUK	11	13	aww7	figs-rquestion	πόσῳ μᾶλλον ὁ Πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, δώσει Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον τοῖς αἰτοῦσιν αὐτόν?	1	how much more will the Father who is from heaven give the Holy Spirit to those who ask him?	Jesus is using the question form to teach his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “your Heavenly Father will even more certainly give the Holy Spirit to those who ask him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 LUK	11	14	uyu1	grammar-connect-time-background	καὶ	1	And	Luke uses this word to begin relating a new event by introducing background information that will help readers understand what happens. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
 LUK	11	14	afa8	figs-explicit	ἦν ἐκβάλλων δαιμόνιον κωφόν	1	he was driving out a mute demon	The **demon** itself was not unable to speak. Rather, it was preventing the man whom it was controlling from speaking. Alternate translation: “Jesus was driving out a demon that was causing a man to be unable to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1899,7 +1899,7 @@ LUK	11	19	l668	figs-explicit	εἰ δὲ ἐγὼ ἐν Βεελζεβοὺλ
 LUK	11	19	l669	translate-names	Βεελζεβοὺλ	1	Beelzebul	See how you translated the name **Beelzebul** in [11:15](../11/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 LUK	11	19	l670	figs-metaphor	οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν	1	your sons	Here, Jesus uses the word **sons** to mean “followers.” Alternate translation: “your followers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	11	19	bs8x	figs-explicit	αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν κριταὶ ἔσονται	1	they will be your judges	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the implications of this statement more explicitly. Alternate translation: “your own followers will say that you are wrong for claiming that I make demons leave people by using the power of Beelzebul, because they know that they are not using that power themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK	11	20	l671	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ…ἐν δακτύλῳ Θεοῦ, ἐγὼ ἐκβάλλω τὰ δαιμόνια, ἄρα ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	if I drive out the demons by the finger of God, then the kingdom of God has come to you	Jesus speaks as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “So I must be making demons leave people by the power of God. This shows that the kingdom of God has come to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+LUK	11	20	l671	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ…ἐν δακτύλῳ Θεοῦ, ἐγὼ ἐκβάλλω τὰ δαιμόνια, ἄρα ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	if I drive out the demons by the finger of God, then the kingdom of God has come to you	Jesus speaks as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “So I must be making demons leave people by the power of God. This shows that the kingdom of God has come to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 LUK	11	20	y643	figs-metonymy	ἐν δακτύλῳ Θεοῦ	1	the finger of God	This phrase refers to God’s power. Alternate translation: “by the power of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	11	20	ja3u	figs-abstractnouns	ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the kingdom of God has come to you	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” This could mean: (1) the kingdom of God has arrived in this place, that is, its activities are happening here. Alternate translation: “God is ruling in this area” (2) the kingdom of God has arrived in time, that is, it already beginning. Alternate translation: “God is beginning to rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 LUK	11	21	e4d1	figs-parables	ὅταν ὁ ἰσχυρὸς καθωπλισμένος	1	When the strong man who is fully armed	To help the people in the crowd understand what he has been teaching, Jesus tells a brief story that provides an illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus told the crowd this story to help them understand. ‘When a strong man who has all his weapons’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
@@ -2161,7 +2161,7 @@ LUK	12	27	l781		λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν, οὐδὲ Σολομὼν	1	But I sa
 LUK	12	27	nug5	figs-abstractnouns	Σολομὼν ἐν πάσῃ τῇ δόξῃ αὐτοῦ	1	Solomon in all his glory	The abstract noun **glory** could mean: (1) “Solomon, who had great wealth.” (2) “Solomon, who wore beautiful clothes.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 LUK	12	27	l782	translate-names	Σολομὼν	1	Solomon	**Solomon** is the name of a man, a great king of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 LUK	12	28	rur9	figs-metaphor	εἰ…ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον, ὁ Θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέζει	1	if God so clothes the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven	Jesus speaks of God making the wild plants beautiful as if God were putting beautiful clothing on them. Alternate translation: “if God makes the wild plants beautiful like this, even though they are alive today and are thrown into the oven tomorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK	12	28	l783	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ…ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον, ὁ Θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέζει	1	if God so clothes the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven	Jesus speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it must be true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is uncertain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since God makes the wild plants so beautiful, even though they are alive today and are thrown into the oven tomorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+LUK	12	28	l783	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ…ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον, ὁ Θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέζει	1	if God so clothes the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven	Jesus speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it must be true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Jesus is saying is uncertain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since God makes the wild plants so beautiful, even though they are alive today and are thrown into the oven tomorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 LUK	12	28	l784	figs-explicit	ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον	1	the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven	While Jesus uses a term that typically means **grass**, in this context he must implicitly mean wild plants in general, since he is referring back to the wild lilies he has just mentioned. So you could express this with a general term in your translation. Alternate translation: “the wild plants, which are alive today and tomorrow are thrown into the oven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	12	28	l785	translate-unknown	ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον	1	the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven	It would be particularly appropriate to use a general term in your translation if your readers would not know what **grass** is. Alternate translation: “the wild plants, which are alive today and tomorrow are thrown into the oven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	12	28	t9am	figs-activepassive	ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον	1	the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who does the action. Alternate translation: “the grass in the field, which exists today, but tomorrow someone throws it into an oven” or, if you decided to say “plants,” “the wild plants, which exist today, but tomorrow someone throws them into an oven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2879,7 +2879,7 @@ LUK	16	30	m097	figs-explicit	οὐχί	1	No	The rich man uses this word to indic
 LUK	16	30	d84a	figs-hypo	ἐάν τις ἀπὸ νεκρῶν πορευθῇ πρὸς αὐτοὺς, μετανοήσουσιν	1	if someone would go to them from the dead, they will repent	The rich man is describing a hypothetical situation that he would like to happen. Alternate translation: “suppose someone who had died went and warned them. Then they would repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 LUK	16	30	m098	figs-nominaladj	ἀπὸ νεκρῶν	1	from the dead	The rich man is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “from among the people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 LUK	16	31	abcl	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ, εἰ Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἀκούουσιν, οὐδ’ ἐάν τις ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ, πεισθήσονται	1	But he said to him, ‘If they do not hear Moses and the prophets, neither will they be persuaded if someone would rise from the dead’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But Abraham told the rich man that if his brothers would not obey the teaching of Moses and the prophets, then they would not change their ways even if someone who had died came back to life and warned them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-LUK	16	31	n9s4	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἀκούουσιν, οὐδ’ ἐάν τις ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ, πεισθήσονται	1	If they do not listen to Moses and the prophets, neither will they be persuaded if someone should rise from the dead	Abraham is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Abraham is saying is not actually the case, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since they will not obey the teaching of Moses and the prophets, a dead person who came back to life would not be able to convince them either” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+LUK	16	31	n9s4	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἀκούουσιν, οὐδ’ ἐάν τις ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ, πεισθήσονται	1	If they do not listen to Moses and the prophets, neither will they be persuaded if someone should rise from the dead	Abraham is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Abraham is saying is not actually the case, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since they will not obey the teaching of Moses and the prophets, a dead person who came back to life would not be able to convince them either” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 LUK	16	31	m099	figs-idiom	εἰ Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἀκούουσιν	1	If they do not listen to Moses and the prophets	The term **listen to** is an idiom that means “obey.” See how you translated this idiom in [16:29](../16/29.md). Alternate translation: “If they will not obey what Moses and the prophets have written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 LUK	16	31	xkr7	figs-metonymy	Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν	1	Moses and the prophets	Abraham is using the names of the authors of the biblical books to refer to their writings. Alternate translation: “what Moses and the prophets have written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 LUK	16	31	m100	figs-merism	Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν	1	Moses and the prophets	Abraham is referring to all of God’s Word that had been written up to that time. He is using two of its major collections of writings to do so. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
@@ -3078,7 +3078,7 @@ LUK	18	3	kj2l	figs-imperative	ἐκδίκησόν με ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀντ
 LUK	18	3	xc7k	translate-unknown	τοῦ ἀντιδίκου μου	1	my opponent	The term **opponent** refers specifically to the opposing party in a lawsuit. It is not clear whether the widow is suing the man to protect her interests, or the man is suing the widow to try to take things from her unfairly. If your language has a specific term for a legal adversary, you could use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 LUK	18	4	m197		μετὰ ταῦτα	1	after these things	Alternate translation: “later on” or “eventually”
 LUK	18	4	m198	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν ἐν ἑαυτῷ, εἰ καὶ τὸν Θεὸν οὐ φοβοῦμαι οὐδὲ ἄνθρωπον ἐντρέπομαι	1	he said to himself, ‘Even if I do not fear God or respect man’	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “he decided that even though he did not make his decisions based on what God wanted or on what other people thought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-LUK	18	4	m199	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ καὶ τὸν Θεὸν οὐ φοβοῦμαι οὐδὲ ἄνθρωπον ἐντρέπομαι	1	Even if I do not fear God or respect man	The judge speaks as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what the judge is saying is not actually the case, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Even though I do not make my decisions based on what God wants or on what other people think” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+LUK	18	4	m199	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ καὶ τὸν Θεὸν οὐ φοβοῦμαι οὐδὲ ἄνθρωπον ἐντρέπομαι	1	Even if I do not fear God or respect man	The judge speaks as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what the judge is saying is not actually the case, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Even though I do not make my decisions based on what God wants or on what other people think” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 LUK	18	4	bh3q	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπον	1	men	The judge is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 LUK	18	5	m200	figs-quotesinquotes	διά γε τὸ παρέχειν μοι κόπον τὴν χήραν ταύτην, ἐκδικήσω αὐτήν, ἵνα μὴ εἰς τέλος ἐρχομένη ὑπωπιάζῃ με	1	yet because this widow causes me trouble, I will vindicate her, so that she will not beat me up by coming to the end	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation (continuing the sentence from the previous verse): “because this widow bothered him, he would give a fair ruling in her case, so that she would not wear him out by coming incessantly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 LUK	18	5	v9uu		παρέχειν μοι κόπον	1	causes me trouble	Alternate translation: “bothers me”
@@ -3249,7 +3249,7 @@ LUK	19	8	m267	translate-symaction	σταθεὶς	1	stood	At a relaxed meal such
 LUK	19	8	s46z		τὸν Κύριον	1	the Lord	Here Luke refers to Jesus by the respectful title **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus”
 LUK	19	8	m268	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	Behold	Zacchaeus uses **behold** to get Jesus to focus his attention on what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “Please listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 LUK	19	8	m269		Κύριε	1	Lord	Zacchaeus is addressing Jesus directly by a respectful title. It would be appropriate to represent the title with the corresponding term in your language and culture, rather than using the name “Jesus.”
-LUK	19	8	m270	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴ τινός τι ἐσυκοφάντησα, ἀποδίδωμι τετραπλοῦν	1	if I have defrauded anything from anyone, I will restore four-fold	Zacchaeus speaks as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. He is inviting anyone he has cheated to come to him for restitution. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Zacchaeus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “I know that I have cheated many people out of their money, and I promise to pay each one back four times as much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+LUK	19	8	m270	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴ τινός τι ἐσυκοφάντησα, ἀποδίδωμι τετραπλοῦν	1	if I have defrauded anything from anyone, I will restore four-fold	Zacchaeus speaks as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. He is inviting anyone he has cheated to come to him for restitution. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Zacchaeus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “I know that I have cheated many people out of their money, and I promise to pay each one back four times as much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 LUK	19	8	u2bt		ἀποδίδωμι τετραπλοῦν	1	I will restore four-fold	Alternate translation: “I will return to them four times as much as I took from them”
 LUK	19	9	m271	figs-explicit	εἶπεν δὲ πρὸς αὐτὸν ὁ Ἰησοῦς	1	Then Jesus said to him	Jesus spoke not just to Zacchaeus but also to the people from the crowd who were complaining that he had gone to visit him. In this culture, people were allowed to stand around the walls of the banquet room in a private home and listen to what an invited guest was saying. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus said to Zacchaeus and to the people from the crowd who were standing around the room” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 LUK	19	9	m272	figs-123person	σωτηρία τῷ οἴκῳ τούτῳ ἐγένετο, καθότι καὶ αὐτὸς υἱὸς Ἀβραάμ ἐστιν	1	salvation has come to this house, because he too is a son of Abraham	Jesus is speaking to Zacchaeus, but he addresses him in the third person because he is also speaking to the people from the crowd. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person here. Alternate translation: “salvation has come to your household, because you too are a son of Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])

en_tn_44-JHN.tsv

@@ -46,13 +46,13 @@ JHN	1	13	no4j	figs-explicit	οἳ	1		**These** here refers to the children of Go
 JHN	1	13	ygxb	figs-metaphor	οἳ οὐκ ἐξ αἱμάτων…ἐγεννήθησαν	1		John uses **born** to describe God changing a person from being spiritually dead to being spiritually alive when they believe in Jesus. John recorded Jesus referring to this change as being “born again” in [3:3](../03/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/bornagain]]) If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an expression that indicates spiritual rebirth rather than physical birth. Alternate translation: “These were born spiritually, not from blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	1	13	k24g	figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἐξ αἱμάτων…ἐγεννήθησαν	1		Here, **bloods** refers to the bloodlines or genetic contributions of both parents of a child. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were not born from human bloodlines” or “were not born from human decent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	1	13	it6r		ἐξ	1		Here, **from** could refer to any of the following: (1) the means by which God’s children are born. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “by” (2) the source from which God’s children are born. Alternate translation: “of” (3) the cause of the birth of God’s children. Alternate translation: “as a result of”
-JHN	1	13	jtjr	figs-ellipsis	οὐδὲ ἐκ θελήματος σαρκὸς	1		John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “nor were they born from the will of the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	1	13	jtjr	figs-ellipsis	οὐδὲ ἐκ θελήματος σαρκὸς	1		John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “nor were they born from the will of the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	1	13	oj53		ἐκ	1		Here, **from** could refer to any of the following: (1) the means by which God’s children are born. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “by” (2) the source from which God’s children are born. Alternate translation: “of” (3) the cause of the birth of God’s children. Alternate translation: “as a result of”
 JHN	1	13	kqdf	figs-metonymy	ἐκ θελήματος σαρκὸς	1		Here John is using the term **flesh** to refer to a human being, which is made of flesh. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the human will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	1	13	jjyp	figs-ellipsis	οὐδὲ ἐκ θελήματος ἀνδρὸς	1		John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “nor were they born from the will of man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	1	13	jjyp	figs-ellipsis	οὐδὲ ἐκ θελήματος ἀνδρὸς	1		John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “nor were they born from the will of man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	1	13	v4t0		ἐκ	2		Here, **from** could refer to any of the following: (1) the means by which God’s children are born. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “by” (2) the source from which God’s children are born. Alternate translation: “of” (3) the cause of the birth of God’s children. Alternate translation: “as a result of”
 JHN	1	13	pbur		ἐκ θελήματος ἀνδρὸς	1		The term **man** used here refers specifically to an adult male person and may also be translated “husband.” In this verse it refers to a father’s desire to have a child like himself. Alternate translation: “from the will of a husband”
-JHN	1	13	bljo	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ ἐκ Θεοῦ	1		John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “but they were born from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	1	13	bljo	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ ἐκ Θεοῦ	1		John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “but they were born from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	1	13	yo2q		ἐκ	3		Here, **from** could refer to any of the following: (1) the means by which God’s children are born. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “by” (2) the source from which God’s children are born. Alternate translation: “of” (3) the cause of the birth of God’s children. Alternate translation: “as a result of”
 JHN	1	14	ft2l	figs-explicit	ὁ λόγος	1	The Word	Here, **the Word** refers to Jesus. It does not refer to a spoken word. ULT indicates this by capitalizing **Word** to indicate that this is a title for Jesus. Use whatever convention your language uses to indicate that this is a name. If “word” is feminine in your language, it could be translated as “the one who is called the Word.” See how you translated this phrase in [John 1:1](../01/01.md). Alternate translation: “Jesus, the Word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	14	x1ae	figs-synecdoche	σὰρξ ἐγένετο	1	became flesh	Here, **flesh** represents “a person” or “a human being.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “became human” or “became a human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ JHN	1	21	vk6r	translate-names	Ἠλείας	1		**Elijah** is the name of a man.
 JHN	1	21	h2dv	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	1	21	nhx9	figs-explicit	ὁ προφήτης	1		Here, **the prophet** refers to a prophet the Jews were waiting for, based on God’s promise to send a prophet like Moses, which is recorded in Deuteronomy 18:15. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the prophet whom God promised to send to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	22	t8ib	writing-pronouns	εἶπαν…αὐτῷ	1		Here, the pronouns **they** and **him** refer to the priests and Levites and John the Baptist, respectively. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the priests and Levites … John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-JHN	1	22	wbd9	figs-ellipsis	τίς εἶ? ἵνα ἀπόκρισιν δῶμεν τοῖς πέμψασιν ἡμᾶς; τί	1		John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. This may require you to change the punctuation of the sentences. Alternate translation: “Who are you? Tell us so that we might given an answer to those who sent us. What” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	1	22	wbd9	figs-ellipsis	τίς εἶ? ἵνα ἀπόκρισιν δῶμεν τοῖς πέμψασιν ἡμᾶς; τί	1		John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. This may require you to change the punctuation of the sentences. Alternate translation: “Who are you? Tell us so that we might given an answer to those who sent us. What” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	1	22	x8wz	figs-exclusive	δῶμεν…ἡμᾶς	1	we may give … us	Here, **we** and **us** refer to the priests and Levites, not to John. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 JHN	1	22	fmc8		ἵνα ἀπόκρισιν δῶμεν	1		Alternate translation: “so that we might tell your answer”
 JHN	1	22	sa3t	figs-explicit	τοῖς πέμψασιν ἡμᾶς	1	they said to him	This phrase refers to the Jewish leaders in Jerusalem. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to those leaders in Jerusalem who sent us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ JHN	1	48	a0ym	figs-explicit	ὄντα ὑπὸ τὴν συκῆν	1		The subjec
 JHN	1	49	l666	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Son of God	**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	1	50	d53b	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι εἶπόν σοι, ὅτι εἶδόν σε ὑποκάτω τῆς συκῆς, πιστεύεις?	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the result for the reason that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Do you believe because I said to you that I saw you underneath the fig tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 JHN	1	50	p3ma	figs-rquestion	ὅτι εἶπόν σοι, ὅτι εἶδόν σε ὑποκάτω τῆς συκῆς, πιστεύεις?	1	Because I said to you … do you believe?	John records Jesus using the question form for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You believe because I said, ‘I saw you underneath the fig tree’!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-JHN	1	50	fhzr	figs-ellipsis	πιστεύεις	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, these words can be supplied from the context. Alternate translation: “do you believe that I am the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	1	50	fhzr	figs-ellipsis	πιστεύεις	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “do you believe that I am the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	1	50	oubk	figs-explicit	μείζω τούτων	1		Jesus uses the plural pronoun **these** to refer to a general category of something, in this case the miraculous display of supernatural knowledge that took place in [verse 48](../01/48.md). Alternate translation: “greater things than this type of thing” or “greater things that this kind of miracle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	1	51	byxy	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	1	51	ga44	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly, truly	Jesus repeats **Truly** in order to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases, forming a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “What I am about to tell you is very true.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -312,7 +312,7 @@ JHN	3	10	vx3u	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1		Here, **these things** refers to all
 JHN	3	11	jt1f	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω σοι	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [3:3](../03/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	3	11	upi7	figs-exclusive	ὃ οἴδαμεν λαλοῦμεν…τὴν μαρτυρίαν ἡμῶν	1	we speak	When Jesus says **we** and **our** in this verse, he was not including Nicodemus. Jesus used these pronouns as a contrast to Nicodemus saying **we** in [3:2](../03/02.md). While Nicodemus used **we** to refer to himself and the other Jewish religious leaders, Jesus could have been referring to: (1) himself and his disciples. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “my disciples and I speak what we know … our testimony” (2) himself and the other members of the Godhead. Alternate translation: “the Father, Spirit, and I speak what we know … our testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 JHN	3	11	j1k1	figs-you	οὐ λαμβάνετε	1	you do not accept	The word **you** is plural and could refer to: (1) the Jewish people in general. Alternate translation: “you Jews” (2) Nicodemus and his fellow Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-JHN	3	12	y4e9	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ τὰ ἐπίγεια εἶπον ὑμῖν	1		John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since I told you earthly things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+JHN	3	12	y4e9	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ τὰ ἐπίγεια εἶπον ὑμῖν	1		John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since I told you earthly things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 JHN	3	12	pt4x	figs-you	εἶπον ὑμῖν…οὐ πιστεύετε, πῶς ἐὰν εἴπω ὑμῖν…πιστεύσετε	1	I told you … you do not believe … how will you believe if I tell you	Throughout this verse, **you** is plural and could refer to: (1) the Jewish people in general. Alternate translation: “you Jews” (2) Nicodemus and his fellow Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you Jewish leaders” See how you translated this word in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JHN	3	12	mf2x	figs-explicit	τὰ ἐπίγεια	1		Here, **earthly things** refers to what Jesus had spoken in [3:3–8](../03/03.md). Those things are called **earthly** because they are about things that take place on earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “these truths about what takes place on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	3	12	c6ia	figs-rquestion	πῶς ἐὰν εἴπω ὑμῖν τὰ ἐπουράνια, πιστεύσετε?	1	how will you believe if I tell you about heavenly things?	Jesus uses a question to emphasize the disbelief of Nicodemus and the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you certainly will not believe if I tell you about heavenly things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -706,7 +706,7 @@ JHN	5	44	g7qd	figs-ellipsis	πιστεῦσαι	1	believe	John records Jesus lea
 JHN	5	44	rn78		δόξαν παρὰ ἀλλήλων λαμβάνοντες	1		Here, **receiving** could refer to: (1) the time they are receiving glory. Alternate translation: “while receiving glory from one another” (2) a causal statement. Alternate translation: “since receiving glory from one another”
 JHN	5	45	kk5q	figs-metonymy	ἔστιν ὁ κατηγορῶν ὑμῶν Μωϋσῆς, εἰς ὃν ὑμεῖς ἠλπίκατε	1		**Moses** here could refer to: (1) the person named Moses who gave the Israelites the law of Moses. (2) the law of Moses itself. Alternate translation: “Moses accuses you in the Law, the very Law in which you have hoped” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	5	46	m9sq	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ	1		John records Jesus making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. Jesus knows that the Jewish leaders do not truly believe Moses. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “you must not believe Moses since you do not believe me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
-JHN	5	47	kxa6	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ…οὐ πιστεύετε	1		John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you do not believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+JHN	5	47	kxa6	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ…οὐ πιστεύετε	1		John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you do not believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 JHN	5	47	b8dd	figs-rquestion	πῶς τοῖς ἐμοῖς ῥήμασιν πιστεύσετε?	1	If you do not believe his writings, how are you going to believe my words?	Jesus is using the question form for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you will certainly never believe my words!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	5	47	x7h9	figs-metonymy	τοῖς ἐμοῖς ῥήμασιν	1	my words	Here, **words** refers to what Jesus said to these Jewish leaders. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what I have told you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	6	intro	xe4t			0		# John 6 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. Jesus’ fourth sign: Jesus feeds a large crowd (6:1–14)<br>2. Jesus’ fifth sign: Jesus walks on the Sea of Galilee (6:15–21)<br>3. Jesus says he is the bread of life (6:22–71)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### King<br><br>The king of any nation was the richest and most powerful person in that nation. The people wanted Jesus to be their king because he gave them food. They thought he would make the Jews into the richest and most powerful nation in the world. They did not understand that Jesus came to die so God could forgive his people’s sins and that the world would persecute his people.<br><br>## Important Metaphors in this Chapter<br><br>### Bread<br><br>Bread was the most common and important food in Jesus’ day, so the word “bread” was their general word for “food.” It is often difficult to translate the word “bread” into the languages of people who do not eat bread, because the general word for food in some languages refers to food that did not exist in Jesus’ culture. Jesus used the word “bread” to refer to himself. He wanted the people to understand that they need him so they can have eternal life, just as people need food to sustain physical life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])<br><br>### Eating the flesh and drinking the blood<br><br>When Jesus said, “unless you would eat the flesh of the Son of Man and would drink his blood, you do not have life in yourselves,” he was speaking of believing in his sacrificial death on the cross for the forgiveness of sins. He also knew that before he died he would tell his followers to commemorate this sacrifice by eating bread and drinking wine. In the event this chapter describes, he expected that his hearers would understand that he was using a metaphor but would not understand to what the metaphor referred. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Parenthetical ideas<br><br>Several times in this passage, John explains something or gives the reader some background information needed to better understand the story. These explanations are intended to give the reader some additional knowledge without interrupting the flow of the narrative. This information is placed inside parentheses.<br><br>### “Son of Man”<br><br>Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” several times in this chapter. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
@@ -955,7 +955,7 @@ JHN	7	3	x8ce	translate-kinship	οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ	1	brothers	Th
 JHN	7	3	id2z	figs-explicit	σοῦ τὰ ἔργα ἃ ποιεῖς	1	the works that you do	Here, **works** refers to the powerful miracles that Jesus was performing. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “your miracles that you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	4	by1h	figs-rpronouns	ζητεῖ αὐτὸς	1		Here, Jesus’ brothers use the reflexive pronoun **himself** in order to emphasize their belief that Jesus wants to make **himself** famous. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “seeks for his own benefit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 JHN	7	4	uj59		ζητεῖ αὐτὸς ἐν παρρησίᾳ εἶναι	1		Alternate translation: “seeks publicity for himself” or “seeks public attention”
-JHN	7	4	mc8r	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ταῦτα ποιεῖς	1		John records Jesus’ brothers speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but they mean that it is actually true. Although they didn’t believe that Jesus was the Messiah at this time, they did not deny that he was doing miracles. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what the brothers are saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you do these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+JHN	7	4	mc8r	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ταῦτα ποιεῖς	1		John records Jesus’ brothers speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but they mean that it is actually true. Although they didn’t believe that Jesus was the Messiah at this time, they did not deny that he was doing miracles. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what the brothers are saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you do these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 JHN	7	4	f33j	figs-metonymy	τῷ κόσμῳ	1	the world	Here, **the world** is used figurative to refer to all of the people in the world. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	7	5	mz2b	writing-background	οὐδὲ γὰρ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ ἐπίστευον εἰς αὐτὸν	1		In this verse John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to give background information about the brothers of Jesus. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ brothers said this because even they did not believe in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	7	5	bs7f	translate-kinship	οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ	1	his brothers	See how you translated **brothers** in verse [3](../07/03.md). Alternate translation: “his younger brothers” or “his half-brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
@@ -1005,7 +1005,7 @@ JHN	7	22	d8sw	writing-background	οὐχ ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ Μωϋσέως
 JHN	7	22	w22v	figs-explicit	τῶν πατέρων	1		Here, **fathers** refers specifically to the first ancestors of the Jewish people, who are often called “the Patriarchs.” Those people are Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. It does not refer to the ancestors of the Jewish people in general. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Patriarchs” or “the men who founded the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	22	cs9z	figs-explicit	ἐν Σαββάτῳ περιτέμνετε ἄνθρωπον	1	on the Sabbath you circumcise a man	Jesus implies that the act of **circumcision** was a kind of work. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you circumcise a male baby on the Sabbath. That is working too” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	7	22	dl6z	figs-genericnoun	ἄνθρωπον	1		Jesus is speaking of any Jewish **man** in general, not of one particular **man**. If this use of **man** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a more natural expression. Alternate translation: “men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-JHN	7	23	t21u	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ περιτομὴν λαμβάνει ἄνθρωπος ἐν Σαββάτῳ	1	If a man receives circumcision on the Sabbath	John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since a man receives circumcision on the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+JHN	7	23	t21u	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ περιτομὴν λαμβάνει ἄνθρωπος ἐν Σαββάτῳ	1	If a man receives circumcision on the Sabbath	John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since a man receives circumcision on the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 JHN	7	23	k04n	figs-genericnoun	λαμβάνει ἄνθρωπος	1		See how you translated **man** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “men receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 JHN	7	23	owuc	grammar-collectivenouns	ὁ νόμος	1		See how you translated **the law** in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
 JHN	7	23	ltsk	figs-activepassive	μὴ λυθῇ ὁ νόμος Μωϋσέως	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you might not break the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1170,7 +1170,7 @@ JHN	8	34	jg3z	figs-metaphor	δοῦλός ἐστιν τῆς ἁμαρτίας
 JHN	8	35	nfyp	figs-genericnoun	ὁ…δοῦλος οὐ μένει…ὁ Υἱὸς μένει	1		Jesus is speaking of slaves and sons in general, not of one particular **slave** and **son**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “slaves do not remain … sons remain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 JHN	8	35	sg4a	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ	1	in the house	Here, Jesus uses **house** to refer to the family that lives inside the **house**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as a permanent member of a family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	8	35	mknn	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ὁ Υἱὸς μένει εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα	1		This clause is in contrast to the previous clause. Although slaves do not remain permanent members of the family who owns them, sons are permanent family members. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but the son remains into eternity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-JHN	8	35	j73t	figs-ellipsis	ὁ Υἱὸς μένει εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “the son remains in the house into eternity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	8	35	j73t	figs-ellipsis	ὁ Υἱὸς μένει εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “the son remains in the house into eternity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	8	36	n6fp	figs-explicit	ἐὰν…ὁ Υἱὸς ὑμᾶς ἐλευθερώσῃ, ὄντως ἐλεύθεροι ἔσεσθε	1	if the Son sets you free, you will be truly free	It is implied that Jesus is talking about freedom from sin. Alternate translation: “if the Son sets you free from sin, you will truly be free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	8	36	w3q1	figs-123person	ἐὰν…ὁ Υἱὸς ὑμᾶς ἐλευθερώσῃ	1	if the Son sets you free	Unlike the generic use of **son** in the previous verse, here Jesus uses **the Son** to refer to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “if I, the Son, free you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	8	36	mapu	figs-metaphor	ἐὰν…ὁ Υἱὸς ὑμᾶς ἐλευθερώσῃ	1		Here Jesus uses **frees** to refer to stopping people from being controlled by their sinful desires. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “if the Son frees you from being controlled by sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1203,7 +1203,7 @@ JHN	8	44	hqmo		ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων λαλεῖ	1		Alternate translation:
 JHN	8	44	k1qu	figs-metaphor	ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ	1	the father of lies	Here Jesus uses **father** to refer to the one who originated the act of lying. Since **the devil** is the first being to tell a lie, he is called the **father** of lying. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the first one to lie” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	8	44	x11i	figs-explicit	ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **it** refers to the act of lying. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the father of lying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	8	46	y3gz	figs-rquestion	τίς ἐξ ὑμῶν ἐλέγχει με περὶ ἁμαρτίας?	1	Which one of you convicts me of sin?	Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that he has never sinned. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “None of you can convict me concerning sin!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-JHN	8	46	kh6a	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ἀλήθειαν λέγω	1	If I speak the truth	John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since I speak the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+JHN	8	46	kh6a	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ἀλήθειαν λέγω	1	If I speak the truth	John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what John is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since I speak the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 JHN	8	46	ibp1	figs-rquestion	διὰ τί ὑμεῖς οὐ πιστεύετέ μοι?	1	why do you not believe me?	Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to scold the Jews for their unbelief. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you have no reason for not believing me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	8	47	lien	figs-explicit	ὁ ὢν ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ…ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐκ ἐστέ	1		The phrase **from God** could refer to: (1) the person to whom the subject belongs, as in the UST. (2) the origin of the subject. Alternate translation: “He who came from God … you did not come from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	8	47	nmmq	figs-gendernotations	ὁ ὢν ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Although **He** is masculine, Jesus is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “A person who is from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
@@ -1216,7 +1216,7 @@ JHN	8	48	fk8t		δαιμόνιον ἔχεις	1		See how you translated this phr
 JHN	8	49	pgts		ἐγὼ δαιμόνιον οὐκ ἔχω	1		See how you translated the similar phrase in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “a demon is not inside of me” or “I am not under the control of a demon”
 JHN	8	50	wmmd	figs-abstractnouns	ζητῶ τὴν δόξαν μου	1	there is one seeking and judging	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “seek to glorify myself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	8	50	fg43	figs-explicit	ἔστιν ὁ ζητῶν καὶ κρίνων	1	there is one seeking and judging	Here, **one** refers to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “God is the one seeking and judging” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	8	50	d00s	figs-ellipsis	ὁ ζητῶν	1		Here, Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “one seeking my glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	8	50	d00s	figs-ellipsis	ὁ ζητῶν	1		Here, Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “one seeking my glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	8	50	cs55	figs-ellipsis	κρίνων	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. Here, **judging** could refer to: (1) God **judging** between what Jesus said about himself and what his Jewish opponents were saying about him. Alternate translation: “judging between your testimony and mine” (2) God condemning those who dishonor Jesus. Alternate translation: “judging those who dishonor me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	8	51	fb52	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	8	51	m46r	figs-metonymy	τὸν ἐμὸν λόγον	1	keeps my word	Here, **word** refers to the message or teachings of Jesus. See how you translated this phrase in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “my message” or “what I say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1270,7 +1270,7 @@ JHN	9	7	ri9h	writing-background	ὃ ἑρμηνεύεται, ἀπεσταλμέ
 JHN	9	7	p54y	figs-explicit	ὃ ἑρμηνεύεται, ἀπεσταλμένος	1	which is translated “Sent”	John assumes that his readers will know that he is saying what the name **Siloam** means when translated from the Aramaic language into Greek. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which is the Aramaic word for ‘Sent’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	9	7	q68b	figs-go	ἦλθεν	1	which is translated “Sent”	As the next verse suggests, the man **came back** to his home, not to Jesus. Your language may state “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 JHN	9	7	rj0w	figs-explicit	βλέπων	1		Here, **seeing** means that the man became able to see before coming back. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “after becoming able to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	9	8	d1vq	figs-ellipsis	ὅτι προσαίτης ἦν	1		This clause is missing some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “those who had seen that he was a beggar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	9	8	d1vq	figs-ellipsis	ὅτι προσαίτης ἦν	1		This clause is missing some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “those who had seen that he was a beggar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	9	8	r79x	figs-rquestion	οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ καθήμενος καὶ προσαιτῶν?	1	Is not this the man that used to sit and beg?	The people here are using a rhetorical question to express their surprise at seeing the blind man who has been healed. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This man is the one who used to sit and beg!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	9	10	m97n	figs-activepassive	πῶς ἠνεῴχθησάν σου οἱ ὀφθαλμοί?	1	Then how were your eyes opened?	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “How did your eyes become opened?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	9	10	yy53	figs-metonymy	πῶς ἠνεῴχθησάν σου οἱ ὀφθαλμοί	1	Then how were your eyes opened?	Here, **eyes** **opened** describes the ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, the **eyes**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “How are you able to see?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1337,7 +1337,7 @@ JHN	9	35	v3a0	figs-explicit	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1		See
 JHN	9	36	gurg		κύριε	1		The formerly blind man calls Jesus **Sir** in order to show respect or politeness. He does not yet know that Jesus is the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lord]])
 JHN	9	37	z3rk	figs-123person	καὶ ὁ λαλῶν μετὰ σοῦ ἐκεῖνός ἐστιν	1		Here, Jesus is referring to himself in third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person form. Alternate translation: “and I, the one who is speaking with you, am that one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	9	38	emlm		Κύριε	1		Now that the formerly blind man knows that Jesus is the **Lord,** he calls Jesus **Lord**. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lord]])
-JHN	9	38	gf4d	figs-ellipsis	πιστεύω	1		Here, the formerly blind man is leaving out some words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from [verse 36](../09/36.md). Alternate translation: “I believe that you are the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	9	38	gf4d	figs-ellipsis	πιστεύω	1		Here, the formerly blind man is leaving out some words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from [verse 36](../09/36.md). Alternate translation: “I believe that you are the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	9	39	azp3	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς κρίμα	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “In order to judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	9	39	te5y	figs-metaphor	ἵνα οἱ μὴ βλέποντες, βλέπωσιν; καὶ οἱ βλέποντες, τυφλοὶ γένωνται	1	so that those who do not see may see and so that those who see may become blind	Here, **not seeing**, **see**, **seeing**, and **become blind** are metaphors. See the discussion of these metaphors in the General Notes for this chapter. If these uses of these words would confuse your readers, you could use similes or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “so that those who know they are spiritually blind might receive spiritual sight, and those who falsely think they have spiritual sight might remain spiritually blind” or “so that those who recognize that they don’t know God might know him, and those who falsely think they know God might continue not knowing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	9	39	t9vo	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἵνα οἱ μὴ βλέποντες, βλέπωσιν; καὶ οἱ βλέποντες, τυφλοὶ γένωνται	1	so that those who do not see may see and so that those who see may become blind	Here, **so that** could indicate that: (1) the rest of the verse is the result of Jesus’ **judgment**, which may require starting a new sentence. Alternate translation: “The result of my judgment will be that those not seeing might see and those seeing might become blind” (2) the rest of the verse is an explanation of the **judgment** Jesus mentioned at the beginning of the verse, which may also require starting a new sentence. Alternate translation: “That judgment is that those not seeing might see and those seeing might become blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -1355,7 +1355,7 @@ JHN	10	1	xq1f	translate-unknown	αὐλὴν τῶν προβάτων	1	sheep pe
 JHN	10	1	zz7x	figs-explicit	κλέπτης…καὶ λῃστής	1	a thief and a robber	The words translated **thief** and **robber** describe two different kinds of criminals. A **thief** is a person who steals by stealth, but a **robber** is a person who steals by force or violence. For this reason, you may want to use “or” instead of **and** between these two terms. Alternate translation: “a thief or a robber” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	10	2	ib4y	figs-possession	ποιμήν…τῶν προβάτων	1		Jesus is using **of** to describe a **shepherd** who takes care of **the sheep**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the shepherd who cares for the sheep” or “the shepherd in charge of the sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	10	3	uy2v	translate-unknown	ὁ θυρωρὸς	1	The gatekeeper opens for him	A **gatekeeper** is a person who guards the sheep pen and opens the gate for the shepherd. If your readers would not be familiar with this way of protecting livestock, you could use a general expression for a person who guards an entrance. Alternate translation: “The gate guard” or “The person guarding the gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-JHN	10	3	q48q	figs-ellipsis	ὁ θυρωρὸς ἀνοίγει	1	The gatekeeper opens	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “The gatekeeper opens the gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	10	3	q48q	figs-ellipsis	ὁ θυρωρὸς ἀνοίγει	1	The gatekeeper opens	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “The gatekeeper opens the gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	10	3	ploz	writing-pronouns	τούτῳ…τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ…τὰ ἴδια πρόβατα φωνεῖ	1		In this verse, **this one**, **his**, and **he** refer to the shepherd mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for this shepherd … the shepherd’s voice … the shepherd calls his own sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	10	3	db3c	figs-metaphor	τὰ πρόβατα τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ ἀκούει	1	The sheep hear his voice	Here, **hear** could mean: (1) all the sheep in the pen **hear** the shepherd’s **voice**, but not all of them respond to it, as in the ULT. This meaning implies that there are multiple flocks in the sheep pen. (2) the sheep that belong to the shepherd heed or obey his **voice**. This implies that **the sheep** are identical with **his own sheep**. Alternate translation: “the sheep heed his voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	3	zxsd	figs-explicit	τὰ ἴδια πρόβατα φωνεῖ κατ’ ὄνομα	1		Here, **his own sheep** are designated as a separate group among **the sheep** of the previous clause. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he calls his own sheep by name out from among all the sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1382,7 +1382,7 @@ JHN	10	9	in9p	figs-metaphor	νομὴν εὑρήσει	1	pasture	Jesus uses the
 JHN	10	10	ymc7	figs-genericnoun	ὁ κλέπτης	1	does not come if he would not steal	Jesus is speaking of thieves in general, not of one particular **thief**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “A thief” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 JHN	10	10	nicf	figs-metaphor	ὁ κλέπτης	1		Jesus uses **thief** to refer to the Jewish leaders who were deceiving the people. See how you translated the similar use of this word in [verse 8](../10/08.md). Alternate translation: “Every leader is like a thief who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	10	h2gf	figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἔρχεται εἰ μὴ ἵνα κλέψῃ	1	does not come if he would not steal	If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “comes only in order that he might steal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-JHN	10	10	h56c	figs-ellipsis	κλέψῃ, καὶ θύσῃ, καὶ ἀπολέσῃ	1	steal and kill and destroy	Here, Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he might steal and kill and destroy the sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	10	10	h56c	figs-ellipsis	κλέψῃ, καὶ θύσῃ, καὶ ἀπολέσῃ	1	steal and kill and destroy	Here, Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he might steal and kill and destroy the sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	10	10	zho7	writing-pronouns	ἔχωσιν	1		Here, **they** refers to the sheep, which is a metaphor for God’s people. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the sheep might have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 JHN	10	10	j2k6	figs-explicit	ἵνα ζωὴν ἔχωσιν	1	so that they will have life	Here, **life** refers to eternal **life**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that they might have eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	10	10	fnu5	figs-explicit	καὶ περισσὸν ἔχωσιν	1		Here, **abundantly** implies that the eternal **life** Jesus’ followers will receive has more blessings than anyone could expect. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and might have it with abundant blessings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1403,7 +1403,7 @@ JHN	10	15	pn9w	figs-euphemism	τὴν ψυχήν μου τίθημι	1	I lay dow
 JHN	10	15	mwpf	figs-metaphor	τῶν προβάτων	1	I lay down my life for the sheep	See how you translated this phrase in the [verse 8](../10/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	16	y3g7	figs-metaphor	ἄλλα πρόβατα ἔχω, ἃ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ τῆς αὐλῆς ταύτης	1	I have other sheep	Jesus uses **other sheep** to refer to his followers who are not Jews. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “I have disciples who are not from the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	16	la1v	figs-metaphor	τῆς αὐλῆς ταύτης	1	I have other sheep	Jesus uses **sheep pen** to refer to the people of Israel. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	10	16	v95z	figs-ellipsis	κἀκεῖνα…ἀγαγεῖν	1	I have other sheep	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. This could mean: (1) Jesus will bring them to himself, as in the UST. (2) Jesus will bring them to God. Alternate translation: “to bring them also to God”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	10	16	v95z	figs-ellipsis	κἀκεῖνα…ἀγαγεῖν	1	I have other sheep	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. This could mean: (1) Jesus will bring them to himself, as in the UST. (2) Jesus will bring them to God. Alternate translation: “to bring them also to God”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	10	16	kq11	figs-metaphor	τῆς φωνῆς μου ἀκούσουσιν	1	I have other sheep	Here, **hear** refers to listening to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. See how you translated this word in [verse 8](../10/08.md). Alternate translation: “they will heed my voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	16	w86n	figs-metaphor	μία ποίμνη	1	one flock and one shepherd	Jesus uses **flock** to refer to all of his followers, including Jews and non-Jews, as if they are one group, like a **flock** of **sheep**. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “one group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	10	16	bobi	figs-metaphor	εἷς ποιμήν	1	one flock and one shepherd	Jesus uses **shepherd** to refer to himself. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for the chapter. See also how you translated **shepherd** in [verse 11](../10/11.md). Alternate translation: “one united group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1463,7 +1463,7 @@ JHN	10	34	rycn	figs-synecdoche	ἐν τῷ νόμῳ ὑμῶν	1		Jesus is usin
 JHN	10	34	b3gp	figs-123person	ἐγὼ εἶπα, θεοί ἐστε	1	You are gods	Jesus quotes [Psalm 82:6](../psa/82/06.md) where God calls some humans **gods**. Jesus does this in order to show that God also used the word “god” to refer to people other than himself. In the verse that Jesus quotes, the first person **I** refers to God. If this might be misunderstood by your readers, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, said, ‘You are gods’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	10	34	h189	figs-quotesinquotes	ἐγὼ εἶπα, θεοί ἐστε	1	You are gods	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “I said that you are gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 JHN	10	35	nfly			0		Verses 35 and 36 are one sentence. In this sentence, Jesus argues by moving from a weaker reason to a stronger reason (an argument from the lesser to the greater). Based on the scripture he quoted in verse 34, Jesus argues that, since God calls humans **gods** in that verse, it is even more appropriate to call him God because he is the Son of God. You may need to change the order of the clauses in order for this idea to be clearer in your language.
-JHN	10	35	ieot	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ἐκείνους εἶπεν θεοὺς	1	the word of God came	**If** indicates a conditional sentence that extends until the end of the next verse. Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since he called them gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+JHN	10	35	ieot	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ἐκείνους εἶπεν θεοὺς	1	the word of God came	**If** indicates a conditional sentence that extends until the end of the next verse. Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what John is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since he called them gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 JHN	10	35	gtb4	figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐγένετο	1	the word of God came	Here, Jesus used the term **word** to describe the message that God said by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s message came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	10	35	m8ji	figs-personification	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐγένετο	1	the word of God came	Jesus speaks of **the word of God** as though it were a person who moved toward those who heard it. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “God spoke his word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 JHN	10	35	g0kv	figs-activepassive	οὐ δύναται λυθῆναι ἡ Γραφή	1	the scripture cannot be broken	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “no one can break the Scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1472,11 +1472,11 @@ JHN	10	36	dvp5	figs-rquestion	ὃν ὁ Πατὴρ ἡγίασεν καὶ ἀ
 JHN	10	36	fj9f	figs-quotesinquotes	ὑμεῖς λέγετε, ὅτι βλασφημεῖς, ὅτι εἶπον, Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰμι	1	You are blaspheming	If the direct quotations inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the two instances of second direct quotations as indirect quotations. Alternate translation: “do you say … that he is blaspheming because I said that I am the Son of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 JHN	10	36	wzhd	figs-123person	ὃν ὁ Πατὴρ ἡγίασεν καὶ ἀπέστειλεν εἰς τὸν κόσμον	1		Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “to me whom the Father sanctified and sent into the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	10	36	rax1	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατὴρ	1	Father … Son of God	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	10	36	r7ex	figs-ellipsis	βλασφημεῖς	1		Jesus is leaving a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. See how you translated “blasphemy” in [verse 33](../10/33.md) and also see the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “You have committed the crime of blaspheming God” or “You are guilty of blaspheming God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	10	36	r7ex	figs-ellipsis	βλασφημεῖς	1		Jesus is leaving a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. See how you translated “blasphemy” in [verse 33](../10/33.md) and also see the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “You have committed the crime of blaspheming God” or “You are guilty of blaspheming God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	10	36	bkl5	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		This phrase, **the Son of God**, is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	10	37	wyd2	figs-possession	τὰ ἔργα τοῦ Πατρός μου	1		Here Jesus is using **of** to describe **works** that God wants him to do. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. See how you translated a similar phrase in [9:4](../09/04.md). Alternate translation: “the works that my Father demands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	10	37	us7v	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατρός	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	10	38	finz	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ δὲ ποιῶ	1	believe in the works	Here, Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “But since I am doing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+JHN	10	38	finz	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ δὲ ποιῶ	1	believe in the works	Here, Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “But since I am doing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 JHN	10	38	k2zf	figs-explicit	τοῖς ἔργοις πιστεύετε	1	believe in the works	Here, **believe in** means to acknowledge that the **works** Jesus does are done with the authority of the Father and prove that he is God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “believe that the works I do are from God” or “believe that the works I do are done with God’s power”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	10	38	t8uf	figs-idiom	ἐν ἐμοὶ ὁ Πατὴρ, κἀγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρί	1	the Father is in me and that I am in the Father	Here Jesus uses the word **in** to express the close personal relationship between himself and God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my Father has a close relationship with me, and I have a close relationship with my Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	10	38	n8ue	figs-doublet	ἐν ἐμοὶ ὁ Πατὴρ, κἀγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρί	1	the Father is in me and that I am in the Father	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that the truth of what Jesus is saying. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “my Father and I are completely joined together as one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ JHN	11	1	p19k	translate-kinship	Μάρθας τῆς ἀδελφῆς αὐτῆ
 JHN	11	2	c6r9	figs-events	ἦν δὲ Μαρία ἡ ἀλείψασα τὸν Κύριον μύρῳ, καὶ ἐκμάξασα τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ ταῖς θριξὶν αὐτῆς	1	It was Mary who anointed the Lord … her hair	Here, John refers to an event that would happen at a time following the events recorded in this chapter ([12:1–8](../12/01.md)). If this might confuse your readers, you could translate this as a future event. Alternate translation: “Now it was Mary who would later anoint the Lord with myrrh and wipe his feet with her hair” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
 JHN	11	2	xlio	translate-kinship	ὁ ἀδελφὸς Λάζαρος	1		Because those who wrote scripture usually listed the names of siblings in order from oldest to youngest, the list in [verse 5](../11/05.md) suggests that Martha was the oldest and **Lazarus** was the youngest of the three siblings. If your language uses different words for **brother** depending on birth order, use the word for a younger **brother** here. Alternate translation: “younger brother Lazarus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 JHN	11	3	ue08	writing-quotations	ἀπέστειλαν…αἱ ἀδελφαὶ πρὸς αὐτὸν λέγουσαι	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “the sisters sent to him, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-JHN	11	3	i2ar	figs-ellipsis	ἀπέστειλαν…πρὸς αὐτὸν	1	sent for Jesus	Here, John is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “sent messengers to him” or “sent a message to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	11	3	i2ar	figs-ellipsis	ἀπέστειλαν…πρὸς αὐτὸν	1	sent for Jesus	Here, John is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “sent messengers to him” or “sent a message to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	11	3	g1im	figs-declarative	Κύριε, ἴδε, ὃν φιλεῖς ἀσθενεῖ	1		Here, the **sisters** are using a present statement to make a request indirectly. They tell Jesus that Lazarus is **sick**, because they want Jesus to come and heal him. If this use of a statement is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “Sir, behold, he whom you love is sick and needs your help” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 JHN	11	3	czm1	figs-metaphor	ἴδε	1		Here, **behold** means to take notice of something or pay attention to something. It is used here to emphasize the urgency of the words that follow. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “take notice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	11	4	nk3g	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὐκ ἔστιν πρὸς θάνατον	1	This sickness is not to death	Here, **not to** indicates that what follows is not the result of the **sickness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “This sickness will not result in death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -1579,7 +1579,7 @@ JHN	11	39	l2pd	translate-kinship	ἡ ἀδελφὴ	1	Martha, the sister of Laza
 JHN	11	39	lt1d	figs-explicit	τεταρταῖος γάρ ἐστιν	1		This means that it has been **four days** since Lazarus **died**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “for he has been dead for four days” or “for it has been four days since he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	11	40	c082	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	11	40	q5mw	figs-rquestion	οὐκ εἶπόν σοι, ὅτι ἐὰν πιστεύσῃς, ὄψῃ τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ?	1	Did I not say to you that, if you believed, you would see the glory of God?	Jesus is using the form of a question to emphasize that God is about to do something wonderful. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I certainly said to you that, if you believe, you would see the glory of God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-JHN	11	40	mpl5	figs-ellipsis	ἐὰν πιστεύσῃς	1		Here, Jesus is leaving out some words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “if you believe in me” or “if you believe that I am the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	11	40	mpl5	figs-ellipsis	ἐὰν πιστεύσῃς	1		Here, Jesus is leaving out some words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “if you believe in me” or “if you believe that I am the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	11	40	pbc9	figs-possession	τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		This could mean: (1) God receives the glory. Alternate translation: “the glorification of God” (2) glory that comes from God. Alternate translation: “the glory from God”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	11	40	lfrs	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God glorified” or “how glorious God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	11	41	lj5j	figs-idiom	Ἰησοῦς ἦρεν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ἄνω	1	Jesus lifted up his eyes	Here, “lifted up his eyes” is an idiom that means to look upward. See how you translated a similar phrase in [4:35](../04/35.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1610,7 +1610,7 @@ JHN	11	51	eh17	figs-synecdoche	ἀποθνῄσκειν ὑπὲρ τοῦ ἔθ
 JHN	11	52	gee2	figs-synecdoche	τοῦ ἔθνους	1		See how you translated **nation** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	11	52	mle1	figs-metaphor	τὰ τέκνα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	children of God	Here John uses the word **children** to express the relationship between God and those who trust Jesus for salvation. That relationship is like the relationship between **children** and their father. See the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to chapter 1. Since this is an important metaphor in the Bible, you should keep it in your translation. However, you can use a simile if it might confuse your readers. Alternate translation: “those who are like God’s children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	11	52	tpe1	figs-activepassive	ἵνα καὶ τὰ τέκνα τοῦ Θεοῦ, τὰ διεσκορπισμένα συναγάγῃ εἰς ἕν	1		If your language does not use the passive voice, you could express the ideas of these two passive phrases in active forms or in another way that is natural in your language. You may need to change the sentence structure in order to do this. Alternate translation: “so that also Jesus would gather together into one the children of God whom God had scattered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	11	52	d85p	figs-ellipsis	συναγάγῃ εἰς ἕν	1	would be gathered together into one	Here, John is leaving out a word that some languages would need in order for the sentence to be complete. The word **people** is implied by the context. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “would be gathered into one people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	11	52	d85p	figs-ellipsis	συναγάγῃ εἰς ἕν	1	would be gathered together into one	Here, John is leaving out a word that some languages would need in order for the sentence to be complete. The word **people** is implied by the context. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “would be gathered into one people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	11	53	xyda	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	would be gathered together into one	John is telling his readers what the Jewish leaders did as a result of what Caiaphas said in [verses 49–50](../11/49.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Consequently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 JHN	11	53	psay		ἐβουλεύσαντο	1		The word translated **plotted** could mean: (1) the Jewish leaders made plans together for how to kill Jesus. Alternate translation: “they schemed” (2) the Jewish leaders were determined to kill Jesus. Alternate translation: “they resolved”
 JHN	11	54	bnd8	figs-synecdoche	παρρησίᾳ περιεπάτει ἐν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	walk openly among the Jews	Here, **the Jews** does not refer to the Jewish people in general. It could refer to: (1) the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “among the Jewish authorities” (2) the people living in Judea. Alternate translation: “among the Judeans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -1625,7 +1625,7 @@ JHN	11	56	kc75	writing-pronouns	ἐζήτουν…τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	They
 JHN	11	56	y3xz	figs-synecdoche	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1		The people were standing in the courtyard of **the temple**. See how you translated **temple** in [verse 14](../08/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	11	56	i7en	figs-idiom	τί δοκεῖ ὑμῖν	1	What do you think? That he will not come to the festival?	This is an idiom used to ask for someone’s opinion. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “What is your opinion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	11	56	p2wz	figs-rquestion	ὅτι οὐ μὴ ἔλθῃ εἰς τὴν ἑορτήν?	1	What do you think? That he will not come to the festival?	The people are using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that they do not think Jesus will **come** to the **Passover** festival. The speakers here were wondering if Jesus would come to the festival since the Jewish leaders wanted to kill him. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “He will certainly not come to the festival!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-JHN	11	56	x6im	figs-ellipsis	ὅτι οὐ μὴ ἔλθῃ εἰς τὴν ἑορτήν?	1		The people are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Does it seem to you that he will come to the festival?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	11	56	x6im	figs-ellipsis	ὅτι οὐ μὴ ἔλθῃ εἰς τὴν ἑορτήν?	1		The people are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Does it seem to you that he will come to the festival?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	11	57	glb6	figs-events	δὲ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς	1	Now the chief priests	This event occurs before that of the previous verse. If this order might confuse your readers, you can combine these verses and put the text of this verse before the text of [verse 56](../11/56.md). Another option would be to clearly state that this verse refers to an earlier event. Alternate translation: “Earlier, the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
 JHN	12	intro	qzv4			0		# John 12 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. Mary pours perfume on Jesus (12:1–11)<br>2. Jesus enters Jerusalem (12:12–19)<br>3. Some Greeks come to Jesus (12:20–26)<br>4. Jesus predicts his death (12:27–36)<br>5. John explains the Jews’ rejection of Jesus (12:37–43)<br>6. Jesus says that he is God (12:44–50)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry sections in [12:38](../12/38.md) and [40](../12/40.md), which are quotations from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Mary poured perfume on Jesus’ feet<br><br>The Jews would put oil on a person’s head to make that person feel welcome and comfortable. They would also put oil on a person’s body after the person had died but before they buried the body. However, they would never think to put oil on a person’s feet, because they thought that feet were dirty.<br><br>### The donkey and the colt<br><br>Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal, which was a common practice for kings. The kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on donkeys. So by riding on a donkey Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel.<br><br>### Glory<br><br>Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. In [12:16](../12/16.md) John says that the glory of Jesus is his resurrection and possibly his return to heaven as well.<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Light and darkness<br><br>In [12:35–36, 46](../12/35.md), Jesus uses an extended metaphor in which light represents what is true and good, and darkness represents what is false and evil. He applies that light metaphor to himself in order to show that he is the embodiment of God’s truth and goodness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. A paradox occurs in [12:25](../12/25.md): “He who loves his life will lose it; but he who hates his life in this world will keep it for eternal life.” But in [12:26](../12/26.md) Jesus explains what it means to keep one’s life for eternal life.<br><br>### “Son of Man”<br><br>Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” several times in this chapter. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 JHN	12	1	s1v2	writing-newevent	οὖν…πρὸ ἓξ ἡμερῶν τοῦ Πάσχα	1	Six days before the Passover	John uses this phrase to mark the beginning of a new event. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later, six days before the Passover” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
@@ -1648,7 +1648,7 @@ JHN	12	5	tted	figs-nominaladj	πτωχοῖς	1		Judas is using the adjective **
 JHN	12	6	ri5l	writing-background		0		In this verse John interrupts the story to explain why Judas made the statement in the previous verse. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	12	6	sl8u	figs-infostructure	εἶπεν…τοῦτο, οὐχ ὅτι περὶ τῶν πτωχῶν ἔμελεν αὐτῷ, ἀλλ’ ὅτι κλέπτης ἦν	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “he said this because he was a thief, not because it was a concern to him about the poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 JHN	12	6	mgm8	figs-nominaladj	τῶν πτωχῶν	1		See how you translated **the poor** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-JHN	12	6	qoun	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ ὅτι κλέπτης ἦν	1		John is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but he said this because he was a thief” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	12	6	qoun	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ ὅτι κλέπτης ἦν	1		John is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but he said this because he was a thief” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	12	6	ol4t	figs-activepassive	τὰ βαλλόμενα	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what people gave him to put in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	12	7	z6s7	figs-ellipsis	ἄφες αὐτήν, ἵνα εἰς τὴν ἡμέραν τοῦ ἐνταφιασμοῦ μου, τηρήσῃ αὐτό	1		This could mean: (1) Jesus is stating the purpose for which Mary did not sell the perfume. In this case he would be leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. This translation would require supplying those words from Judas’ objection in [verse 5](../12/05.md) and making a new sentence. Alternate translation: “Leave her alone. She did not sell this perfumed oil so that she might keep it for the day of my burial” (2) Jesus is giving the purpose for his command in the previous clause. In this case he would be implying that there was some leftover perfumed oil which Mary could later put on his dead body. Alternate translation: “Leave her alone so that she might keep it for the day of my burial” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	12	7	dcn3	figs-explicit	ἄφες αὐτήν, ἵνα εἰς τὴν ἡμέραν τοῦ ἐνταφιασμοῦ μου, τηρήσῃ αὐτό	1	Allow her to keep what she has for the day of my burial	If Jesus is stating the reason why Mary had the perfume, then Jesus is implying that Mary’s actions can be understood as anticipating his death and **burial**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. You may need to add a new sentence. Alternate translation: “Leave her alone. She did not sell this perfumed oil so that she might keep it to prepare my body for burial, as she had just done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1828,7 +1828,7 @@ JHN	13	8	oy8j	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense
 JHN	13	8	f6dg	figs-doublenegatives	ἐὰν μὴ νίψω σε, οὐκ ἔχεις μέρος μετ’ ἐμοῦ	1	If I do not wash you, you have no share with me	**Jesus** uses two negative statements to convince **Peter** to allow him to **wash** his **feet**. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “I must wash you so that you can have a share with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 JHN	13	8	m90p	figs-explicit	ἐὰν μὴ νίψω σε, οὐκ ἔχεις μέρος μετ’ ἐμοῦ	1		Here, Jesus’ use of **no share with me** could imply: (1) that Peter must let him wash his feet if he wants to receive his **share** of the inheritance that God promised to give his people. Alternate translation: “If I do not wash you, you will not share in God’s promised inheritance with me” (2) that Peter must let him wash his feet if he wants to continue being his disciple. Alternate translation: “If I do not wash you, you will no longer be my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	13	9	bjgq	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	13	9	irnh	figs-ellipsis	μὴ τοὺς πόδας μου μόνον,	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “wash not only my feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	13	9	irnh	figs-ellipsis	μὴ τοὺς πόδας μου μόνον,	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “wash not only my feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	13	10	dp8l	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	13	10	is57	figs-metaphor	ὁ λελουμένος οὐκ ἔχει χρείαν, εἰ μὴ τοὺς πόδας νίψασθαι	1	He who is bathed has no need, except to wash his feet	In this verse, Jesus uses **washed** to refer to God forgiving a person for their sins. He also uses **feet** to refer to daily sins, because people in Jesus’ culture had to wash their **feet** frequently due to wearing sandals while walking on dusty, dirty roads. If this might confuse your readers, you could state their meanings clearly or use similes. Alternate translation: “The one who has received God’s forgiveness for their sins, only needs to be forgiven for his daily sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	13	10	bbon	figs-activepassive	ὁ λελουμένος	1	He who is bathed has no need, except to wash his feet	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The one who someone had washed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1838,24 +1838,24 @@ JHN	13	11	tzj7	writing-background		0		Here John interrupts the story to give the
 JHN	13	11	ccz4	figs-metaphor	οὐχὶ πάντες καθαροί ἐστε	1	Not all of you are clean	See how you translated **clean** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Not all of you have received God’s forgiveness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	13	12	p45l	figs-rquestion	γινώσκετε τί πεποίηκα ὑμῖν?	1	Do you know what I have done for you?	Jesus is using a question to emphasize the importance of what he is teaching his disciples. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You need to understand what I have done for you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 JHN	13	13	m9z8	figs-explicit	ὑμεῖς φωνεῖτέ με ὁ Διδάσκαλος καὶ, ὁ Κύριος	1	You call me ‘teacher’ and ‘Lord,’	Here Jesus implies that his disciples have great respect for him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “You show me great respect when you call me ‘teacher’ and ‘Lord.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	13	14	xlgr	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ οὖν ἐγὼ ἔνιψα ὑμῶν τοὺς πόδας, ὁ Κύριος καὶ ὁ Διδάσκαλος	1		Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If I then, the Lord and the Teacher, have washed your feet, and I have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+JHN	13	14	xlgr	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ οὖν ἐγὼ ἔνιψα ὑμῶν τοὺς πόδας, ὁ Κύριος καὶ ὁ Διδάσκαλος	1		Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If I then, the Lord and the Teacher, have washed your feet, and I have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 JHN	13	15	pk3l	figs-declarative	καθὼς ἐγὼ ἐποίησα ὑμῖν, καὶ ὑμεῖς ποιῆτε	1	you should also do just as I did for you	Jesus is using a statement to give an instruction. Jesus is telling his disciples to follow his example and serve one another. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “you also must do just as I did to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 JHN	13	16	h6gt	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	13	16	tpl8	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔστιν δοῦλος μείζων τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ, οὐδὲ ἀπόστολος μείζων τοῦ πέμψαντος αὐτόν	1	greater	Here, **greater** means to be more important or deserving of more respect than another person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “a slave is not respected more than his master, nor is a messenger respected more than the one who sent him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	13	16	rj4z	figs-doublet	οὐκ ἔστιν δοῦλος μείζων τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ, οὐδὲ ἀπόστολος μείζων τοῦ πέμψαντος αὐτόν	1	greater	These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Jesus’ disciples are not more important than him, so they should humbly serve each other. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “none of you are greater than me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	13	16	k3zj	figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἔστιν δοῦλος μείζων τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ	1	greater	Jesus uses the words **slave** and **master** to refer to his disciples and himself, respectively. He is telling his disciples that they should humbly serve each other because they are not more important than him, and he has humbly served them. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Jesus’ meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “you are not greater than me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	13	16	la0x	figs-metaphor	οὐδὲ ἀπόστολος μείζων τοῦ πέμψαντος αὐτόν	1	greater	Jesus uses **messenger** and **the one who sent him** to refer to his disciples and himself, respectively. He is telling his disciples that they should humbly serve each other because they are not more important than him, and he has humbly served them. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Jesus’ meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “and you are not greater than me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	13	17	nwhg	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ταῦτα οἴδατε	1		Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If you know these things, which you do,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+JHN	13	17	nwhg	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ταῦτα οἴδατε	1		Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If you know these things, which you do,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 JHN	13	17	nxou	figs-activepassive	μακάριοί ἐστε	1	you are blessed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that God did it. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	13	18	ji7u	figs-explicit	οὐ περὶ πάντων ὑμῶν λέγω	1		Here Jesus is referring back to what he just said in the previous verse. He means that not all of those to whom he is speaking will be blessed for serving each other, because one of them, Judas Iscariot, will betray him. If this clause would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am not speaking this about all of you” or “I am not saying that God will bless all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	13	18	ztpw	figs-explicit	ἐγὼ οἶδα τίνας ἐξελεξάμην	1		Here Jesus states that he knew the character of every person he chose to be his disciple. Therefore, he knew Judas would betray him when he chose him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I know exactly the kind of men I have chosen to be my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	13	18	lpug	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but I chose one who will betray me so that the scripture might be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	13	18	lpug	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but I chose one who will betray me so that the scripture might be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	13	18	u5fl	figs-activepassive	ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ	1	this so that the scripture will be fulfilled	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this is in order to fulfill the scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	13	18	dk5l	writing-quotations	ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ	1		Here Jesus uses **that the scripture might be fulfilled** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 41:9](../../psa/41/09.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “so that what is written in the Psalms might be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	13	18	tx1f	figs-quotemarks	ὁ τρώγων μετ’ ἐμοῦ τὸν ἄρτον, ἐπῆρεν ἐπ’ ἐμὲ τὴν πτέρναν αὐτοῦ	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 41:9](../../psa/41/09.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 JHN	13	18	v5pv	figs-idiom	ὁ τρώγων μετ’ ἐμοῦ τὸν ἄρτον, ἐπῆρεν ἐπ’ ἐμὲ τὴν πτέρναν αὐτοῦ	1	He who eats my bread lifted up his heel against me	The phrase, **The one eating bread with me**, here is an idiom that refers to someone who acts like a friend would act. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “The one who has acted like he is my friend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	13	18	wr0c	figs-idiom	ἐπῆρεν ἐπ’ ἐμὲ τὴν πτέρναν αὐτοῦ	1	He who eats my bread lifted up his heel against me	Here, **lifted up his heel** is an idiom that refers to someone who has become an enemy. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “has turned against me” or “has become my enemy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-JHN	13	19	qd39	figs-ellipsis	ἀπ’ ἄρτι λέγω ὑμῖν	1	I tell you this now before it happens	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	13	19	qd39	figs-ellipsis	ἀπ’ ἄρτι λέγω ὑμῖν	1	I tell you this now before it happens	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	13	19	gg19	figs-explicit	ἐγώ εἰμι	1	I AM	See how you translated **I am** in [8:24](../08/24.md), and also see the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes for Chapter 8. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	13	20	di3t	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	13	20	zcyh	figs-doublet	ὁ λαμβάνων…λαμβάνει…λαμβάνων…λαμβάνει	1		In this verse, **receiving** and **receives** mean to accept or welcome a person into one’s presence with friendliness. See how you translated this word in [1:12](../01/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -1870,7 +1870,7 @@ JHN	13	25	iqcj	figs-explicit	ἐκεῖνος…λέγει	1	Jesus’ side	Here,
 JHN	13	25	kqza	figs-explicit	λέγει	1	Jesus’ side	[Verse 28](../13/28.md) indicates that the disciples did not know why Jesus spoke to Judas in the way he did. This means that they must not have heard the conversation in this verse and the next, because John and Jesus were speaking quietly. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “said in a quite voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	13	25	b22k	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1	Jesus’ side	Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	13	26	qpj8	translate-names	Ἰούδᾳ Σίμωνος Ἰσκαριώτη	1		See how you translated this phrase in [6:71](../06/71.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-JHN	13	27	r8lk	figs-ellipsis	καὶ μετὰ τὸ ψωμίον	1	Then after the bread	John is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “And after Judas took the bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	13	27	r8lk	figs-ellipsis	καὶ μετὰ τὸ ψωμίον	1	Then after the bread	John is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “And after Judas took the bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	13	27	xk39	figs-idiom	τότε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς ἐκεῖνον ὁ Σατανᾶς	1	Satan entered into him	Here, **entered into** is an idiom that means that **Satan** took control of Judas. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Satan then started to command Judas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	13	27	agd7	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	13	28	r37z	writing-background		0		In [verses 28–29](../13/28.md) John interrupts the main storyline in order to provide background information about the disciples’ confusion. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
@@ -1911,7 +1911,7 @@ JHN	14	1	rq43	figs-declarative	πιστεύετε εἰς τὸν Θεόν, κα
 JHN	14	2	eca3	figs-metaphor	ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ τοῦ Πατρός μου	1	In my Father’s house	Jesus uses **house** to refer to heaven, which is the place where God dwells. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “In the place where my Father dwells” or “In heaven where my Father dwells”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	14	2	v9px	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατρός	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	14	2	n3wl		εἰ δὲ μή, εἶπον ἂν ὑμῖν, ὅτι πορεύομαι ἑτοιμάσαι τόπον ὑμῖν	1	Father	The word translated **for** could also be translated “that,” in which case this sentence would be a question instead of a statement. With either interpretation the point of the sentence is the same: Jesus is emphasizing that what he has just said in the previous sentence is true. He is going to heaven **to prepare a place for** his people. Alternate translation: “But if not, would I have told you that I am going to prepare a place for you?”
-JHN	14	3	sadi	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν πορευθῶ	1		Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he knows that it will actually take place. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when I go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+JHN	14	3	sadi	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν πορευθῶ	1		Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he knows that it will actually take place. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when I go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 JHN	14	4	ir1d	figs-extrainfo	τὴν ὁδόν	1	the way	Here Jesus uses **the way**. This could refer to: (1) himself as the means by which people can go to God in heaven, which is clearly the meaning for **the way** in [verse 6](../14/06.md). (2) a manner of life that will eventually lead someone to be with God in heaven. Since the disciples did not understand this when Jesus said it, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 JHN	14	5	aode	translate-names	Θωμᾶς	1		See how you translated the name **Thomas** in [11:16](../11/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	14	5	o21d	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
@@ -1922,7 +1922,7 @@ JHN	14	6	i8le	figs-metaphor	ἡ ἀλήθεια	1	the truth	Jesus uses **the tru
 JHN	14	6	z9tr	figs-metaphor	ἡ ζωή	1	the life	Jesus uses **the life** to indicate that he is the means by which people can receive eternal **life**. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who makes people spiritually alive” or “the means by which one may receive eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	14	6	g5hn	figs-explicit	οὐδεὶς ἔρχεται πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα, εἰ μὴ δι’ ἐμοῦ	1	no one comes to the Father except through me	Here, **through me** means that a person can come to God only by trusting Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “No one comes to the Father except by believing in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	14	6	f95q	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατέρα	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	14	7	wx89	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ἐγνώκατε με	1	Father	Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If you have known me, and you have known me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+JHN	14	7	wx89	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ἐγνώκατε με	1	Father	Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If you have known me, and you have known me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 JHN	14	8	wwv7	translate-names	Φίλιππος	1		See how you translated the name **Philip** in [1:43](../01/43.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	14	8	fy8b	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	14	8	kum1	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Κύριε, δεῖξον ἡμῖν τὸν Πατέρα	1	Lord, show us the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@@ -1943,9 +1943,9 @@ JHN	14	11	r2w8	figs-explicit	τὰ ἔργα	1		See how you translated **work**
 JHN	14	12	gh64	figs-doublet	ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν,	1	Truly, truly	Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	14	12	icjc	figs-infostructure	ὁ πιστεύων εἰς ἐμὲ, τὰ ἔργα ἃ ἐγὼ ποιῶ, κἀκεῖνος ποιήσει	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “the one believing in me will also do the works that I do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 JHN	14	12	h2rh	figs-explicit	τὰ ἔργα	1		See how you translated **works** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	14	12	ui5t	figs-ellipsis	καὶ μείζονα τούτων ποιήσει	1		Jesus is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “and he will do greater works than these” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	14	12	ui5t	figs-ellipsis	καὶ μείζονα τούτων ποιήσει	1		Jesus is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “and he will do greater works than these” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	14	12	cn14	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατέρα	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	14	13	bn30	figs-ellipsis	ὅ τι ἂν αἰτήσητε	1	Whatever you ask in my name	Jesus is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “whatever you might ask God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	14	13	bn30	figs-ellipsis	ὅ τι ἂν αἰτήσητε	1	Whatever you ask in my name	Jesus is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “whatever you might ask God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	14	13	n2id	figs-idiom	ὅ τι ἂν αἰτήσητε ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου	1	Whatever you ask in my name	Here, **ask in my name** could mean: (1) to request something as the representative of Jesus or as if Jesus himself were requesting it. Alternate translation: “whatever you might ask as if I were asking” or “whatever you might ask that I would ask” (2) to request something with the authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “whatever you ask with my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	14	13	i138	figs-activepassive	ἵνα δοξασθῇ ὁ Πατὴρ ἐν τῷ Υἱῷ	1	so that the Father will be glorified in the Son	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The one that may do the action could be: (1) Jesus, in which case **in the Son** would mean “by the Son.” Alternate translation: “so that the Son may glorify the Father” (2) everyone who experiences the result of what has been asked. Alternate translation: “so that everyone may glorify the Father in the Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	14	13	j6nh	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ…Υἱῷ	1	Father … Son	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@@ -1993,7 +1993,7 @@ JHN	14	26	jjhy	figs-idiom	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου	1	Father	Here, **in
 JHN	14	26	ig83	figs-hyperbole	πάντα	1		Here, **everything** is an exaggeration that Jesus uses for emphasis. He means that the **Holy Spirit** would teach the disciples all that they needed to know about what he had taught them. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the plain meaning. Alternate translation: “everything that you need to know about what I have said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 JHN	14	27	t9c4	figs-abstractnouns	εἰρήνην ἀφίημι ὑμῖν; εἰρήνην τὴν ἐμὴν δίδωμι ὑμῖν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I leave you a peaceful feeling; I give you my peaceful feeling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 JHN	14	27	fb4o	figs-metaphor	εἰρήνην ἀφίημι ὑμῖν	1		Jesus speaks of **peace** as if it were an object that he could **leave** with someone. If this would confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “You will feel peace after I leave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-JHN	14	27	jve8	figs-ellipsis	οὐ καθὼς ὁ κόσμος δίδωσιν, ἐγὼ δίδωμι ὑμῖν	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “I do not give to you peace as the world gives peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	14	27	jve8	figs-ellipsis	οὐ καθὼς ὁ κόσμος δίδωσιν, ἐγὼ δίδωμι ὑμῖν	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “I do not give to you peace as the world gives peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	14	27	i7gm	figs-explicit	οὐ καθὼς ὁ κόσμος δίδωσιν, ἐγὼ δίδωμι ὑμῖν	1		Here, **as the world gives** could mean: (1) the manner in which **the world gives** **peace**. Alternate translation: “I do not give to you in the manner that the world gives” (2) the type of **peace** that **the world gives**. Alternate translation: “I do not give to you the kind of peace that the world gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	14	27	nx8a	figs-metonymy	κόσμος	1	world	See how you translated the **world** in [verse 17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	14	27	m6qq	figs-metaphor	μὴ ταρασσέσθω ὑμῶν ἡ καρδία	1	Do not let your heart be troubled, and do not be afraid	See how you translated this clause in [verse 1](../14/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -2002,7 +2002,7 @@ JHN	14	28	ayiy	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ ἠγαπᾶτέ με,
 JHN	14	28	s3t3	figs-explicit	πορεύομαι πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα	1	I am going to the Father	Here Jesus implies that he will return to his **Father**. Alternate translation: “I am going back to the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	14	28	gtk5	figs-explicit	ὁ Πατὴρ μείζων μού ἐστιν	1	the Father is greater than I	Here Jesus could mean: (1) that the Father has greater authority than the Son while the Son is on the earth. Alternate translation: “the Father has greater authority than I have here” (2) that Jesus functions in a subordinate role to the Father for all time. Alternate translation: “the role of the Father is superior to the role that I have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	14	28	ymq4	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Πατέρα…ὁ Πατὴρ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	14	29	cj9y	figs-ellipsis	εἴρηκα ὑμῖν	1	Father	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “I have told you this” or “I have told you what will happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	14	29	cj9y	figs-ellipsis	εἴρηκα ὑμῖν	1	Father	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “I have told you this” or “I have told you what will happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	14	30	ah3s	figs-explicit	ὁ τοῦ κόσμου ἄρχων	1	ruler of this world	Here, **the ruler of this world** refers to Satan. See how you translated this phrase in [12:31](../12/31.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	14	30	ea6m	figs-explicit	ἐν ἐμοὶ οὐκ ἔχει οὐδέν	1	ruler … is coming	Here, **has nothing in me** means that Satan has no control over Jesus and cannot make him do anything. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he is not able to control me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	14	31	n3et	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἀλλ’ ἵνα γνῷ ὁ κόσμος, ὅτι ἀγαπῶ τὸν Πατέρα, καὶ καθὼς ἐνετείλατο μοι ὁ Πατὴρ, οὕτως ποιῶ	1		Here, **so that** introduces a purpose clause. The first event that is done to accomplish this purpose could be: (1) a phrase Jesus left out that can be supplied from the context of the previous verses. Alternate translation: “but the ruler of this world is coming so that the world might know that I love the Father, and just as the Father commanded me, thus I do” or “but these things will happen so that the world might know that I love the Father, and just as the Father commanded me, thus I do” (2) what is stated later in the sentence, in which case the order of the clauses must be changed. Alternate translation: “but just as the Father commanded me, thus I do so that the world might know that I love the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
@@ -2034,7 +2034,7 @@ JHN	15	6	ura6	writing-pronouns	καὶ συνάγουσιν αὐτὰ καὶ
 JHN	15	6	e789	figs-activepassive	καίεται	1	they are burned up	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the fire burns them up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	15	7	knr4	figs-explicit	μείνητε ἐν ἐμοὶ	1	ask whatever you wish	See how you translated **remain in me** in the previous three verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	15	7	lpzq	figs-idiom	τὰ ῥήματά μου ἐν ὑμῖν μείνῃ	1	ask whatever you wish	This is an idiom that means to obey Jesus. See how you translated a similar expression in [8:31](../08/31.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-JHN	15	7	m38f	figs-ellipsis	ὃ ἐὰν θέλητε, αἰτήσασθε	1	ask whatever you wish	Jesus is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “ask God whatever you desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	15	7	m38f	figs-ellipsis	ὃ ἐὰν θέλητε, αἰτήσασθε	1	ask whatever you wish	Jesus is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “ask God whatever you desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	15	7	mcz5	figs-activepassive	γενήσεται ὑμῖν	1	it will be done for you	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will do it for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	15	8	pq2t	figs-pastforfuture	ἐν τούτῳ ἐδοξάσθη ὁ Πατήρ μου	1	My Father is glorified in this	Jesus is using the past tense in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. He is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If this is confusing in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “My Father will be glorified in this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	15	8	yq67	figs-activepassive	ἐν τούτῳ ἐδοξάσθη ὁ Πατήρ μου	1	My Father is glorified in this	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You have glorifed my Father in this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2058,7 +2058,7 @@ JHN	15	16	kc4z	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα ὅ τι ἂν αἰτήσητ
 JHN	15	16	bcy1	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Πατέρα	1	the Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	15	16	acqo	figs-idiom	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου	1		See how you translated **in my name** in [14:13](../14/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	15	17	rib2		ταῦτα	1		Here, **These things** could refer to: (1) the commands Jesus referred to in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “These commands” (2) the command in the second half of this verse. Alternate translation: “This”
-JHN	15	18	ntzw	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ὁ κόσμος ὑμᾶς μισεῖ	1	the world	Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If the world hates you, and it does hate you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+JHN	15	18	ntzw	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ὁ κόσμος ὑμᾶς μισεῖ	1	the world	Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If the world hates you, and it does hate you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 JHN	15	18	d5ff	figs-metonymy	ὁ κόσμος	1	the world	Here Jesus uses **world** to refer to the people in the **world** who oppose God. See how you translated **world** in [14:17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	15	19	aj8s	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου ἦτε	1	the world	Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that his disciples are not **from the world**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If you were from the world, but you are not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 JHN	15	19	x6q8	figs-metonymy	τοῦ κόσμου…ὁ κόσμος…τοῦ κόσμου…τοῦ κόσμου…ὁ κόσμος	1	the world	See how you translated **the world** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -2284,7 +2284,7 @@ JHN	18	13	je4z	figs-explicit	πρὸς Ἅνναν πρῶτον, ἦν γὰρ
 JHN	18	14	kzvh	writing-background		0		In this verse John interrupts the main storyline in order to provide some background information about Caiaphas. This information helps the reader understand why they took Jesus to Caiaphas. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	18	14	xq5l	figs-synecdoche	τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1		See how you translated **to the Jews** in [verse 12](../18/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 JHN	18	14	fkx1		συμφέρει ἕνα ἄνθρωπον ἀποθανεῖν ὑπὲρ τοῦ λαοῦ	1		See how you translated the similar clause in [11:50](../11/50.md).
-JHN	18	14	uqs5	figs-ellipsis	συμφέρει ἕνα ἄνθρωπον ἀποθανεῖν ὑπὲρ τοῦ λαοῦ	1		Caiaphas is leaving out a clause that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from his original statement in [11:50](../11/50.md). Alternate translation: “it would be better for one man to die on behalf of the people than to let the Romans kill all of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	18	14	uqs5	figs-ellipsis	συμφέρει ἕνα ἄνθρωπον ἀποθανεῖν ὑπὲρ τοῦ λαοῦ	1		Caiaphas is leaving out a clause that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from his original statement in [11:50](../11/50.md). Alternate translation: “it would be better for one man to die on behalf of the people than to let the Romans kill all of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	18	15	p7ms	translate-names	Σίμων Πέτρος	1		See how you translated **Simon Peter** in [1:40](../01/40.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 JHN	18	15	xshi	figs-explicit	ἠκολούθει…τῷ Ἰησοῦ…ἄλλος μαθητής. ὁ δὲ μαθητὴς ἐκεῖνος ἦν γνωστὸς τῷ ἀρχιερεῖ, καὶ συνεισῆλθεν	1		Here, **another disciple** and **that disciple** could refer to: (1) the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. This interpretation would mean that these phrases would be similar to the phrase “the other disciple, whom Jesus loved” that occurs in ([20:2](../20/02.md)). Alternate translation: “I, another disciple, followed Jesus. Now I was known to the high priest, and I entered” (2) an unknown disciple. Alternate translation: “a certain disciple, followed Jesus. Now that other disciple was known to the high priest, and he entered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	18	15	hch7	figs-activepassive	ὁ δὲ μαθητὴς ἐκεῖνος ἦν γνωστὸς τῷ ἀρχιερεῖ	1	Now that disciple was known to the high priest, and he entered with Jesus	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Now the high priest knew that disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2358,7 +2358,7 @@ JHN	18	38	h1b8	figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ οὐδεμίαν αἰτίαν εὑρί
 JHN	18	39	nhqn	figs-explicit	ἕνα ἀπολύσω ὑμῖν	1		Pilate implies that he would **release** a prisoner when the Jewish leaders asked him to do so. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would release one prisoner to you at your request” or “I would release one prisoner to you when you asked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	18	39	fm16	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ Πάσχα	1		Here, **the Passover** refers to the entire **Passover** festival. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the Passover festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	18	40	xdxz	writing-quotations	ἐκραύγασαν…πάλιν λέγοντες	1		Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “they cried out again and said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-JHN	18	40	a7pl	figs-ellipsis	μὴ τοῦτον, ἀλλὰ τὸν Βαραββᾶν	1	Not this man, but Barabbas	The Jewish leaders are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Do not release this one, but release Barabbas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	18	40	a7pl	figs-ellipsis	μὴ τοῦτον, ἀλλὰ τὸν Βαραββᾶν	1	Not this man, but Barabbas	The Jewish leaders are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Do not release this one, but release Barabbas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	18	40	qy3p	figs-explicit	τοῦτον	1	Not this man, but Barabbas	Here the Jewish leaders say **this one** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus without saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	18	40	h11k	writing-background	ἦν δὲ ὁ Βαραββᾶς λῃστής	1	Now Barabbas was a robber	In this sentence John provides background information about **Barabbas**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	18	40	ovim	translate-names	τὸν Βαραββᾶν…ὁ Βαραββᾶς	1		**Barabbas** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -2383,7 +2383,7 @@ JHN	19	7	x7bg	figs-synecdoche	ἀπεκρίθησαν αὐτῷ οἱ Ἰουδ
 JHN	19	7	vr7p	figs-idiom	Υἱὸν Θεοῦ ἑαυτὸν ἐποίησεν	1	he has to die because he claimed to be the Son of God	Here, **made himself** is an idiom that refers to pretending to be something they think he is not. If this might confuse your readers, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “he pretended to be the Son of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	19	7	xt93	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸν Θεοῦ	1	Son of God	**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	19	8	lw3u	figs-metonymy	τοῦτον τὸν λόγον	1		Here, **word** refers to what the Jewish leaders said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “what they said about Jesus claiming to be the Son of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	19	8	nx2u	figs-ellipsis	μᾶλλον ἐφοβήθη	1		John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he grew even more afraid of condemning Jesus” or “he grew even more afraid than before of what might happen to him if he condemned Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	19	8	nx2u	figs-ellipsis	μᾶλλον ἐφοβήθη	1		John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he grew even more afraid of condemning Jesus” or “he grew even more afraid than before of what might happen to him if he condemned Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	19	9	seyo	figs-explicit	εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ πραιτώριον πάλιν, καὶ λέγει τῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		John implies that the soldiers brought Jesus back into the governor’s palace so Pilate could speak with him. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he entered into the governor’s palace again and told the soldiers to bring Jesus back inside. Then he says to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	9	lb11	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	19	10	wcm8	figs-rquestion	ἐμοὶ οὐ λαλεῖς?	1	Are you not speaking to me?	**Pilate** is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize his surprise that Jesus does not answer his question. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I cannot believe you are refusing to speak to me!” or “Answer me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -2391,7 +2391,7 @@ JHN	19	10	iap3	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἶδας ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔ
 JHN	19	11	x2as	figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ εἶχες ἐξουσίαν κατ’ ἐμοῦ οὐδεμίαν, εἰ μὴ ἦν δεδομένον σοι ἄνωθεν	1	You do not have any power over me except for what has been given to you from above	If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “You only have authority over me because that authority has been given to you from above” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 JHN	19	11	fxu9	figs-metaphor	εἰ μὴ ἦν δεδομένον σοι ἄνωθεν	1		Here, **above** is used to refer to God who dwells in heaven **above**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “from heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	19	11	i7nu	figs-activepassive	εἰ μὴ ἦν δεδομένον σοι ἄνωθεν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “except for what God has given to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	19	11	vc79	figs-ellipsis	μείζονα ἁμαρτίαν ἔχει	1	gave me over	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “has a greater sin than your sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	19	11	vc79	figs-ellipsis	μείζονα ἁμαρτίαν ἔχει	1	gave me over	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “has a greater sin than your sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	19	11	kbrx	figs-metaphor	μείζονα ἁμαρτίαν ἔχει	1	gave me over	Jesus speaks of **sin** as if it were an object that a person could possess in varying amounts. If this use of **sin** might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “are more sinful” or “has committed worse sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 JHN	19	12	a39p	figs-explicit	ἐκ τούτου	1	At this answer	Here, **this** refers to Jesus’ answer. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “When Pilate heard Jesus’ answer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	12	q1vq	figs-synecdoche	οἱ…Ἰουδαῖοι	1		Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -2420,9 +2420,9 @@ JHN	19	16	j6jg	figs-explicit	ἀπήγαγον	1		The phrase **led him away** im
 JHN	19	17	qv6j	figs-activepassive	εἰς τὸν λεγόμενον, Κρανίου Τόπον, ὃ λέγεται Ἑβραϊστὶ, Γολγοθᾶ	1	to the place called “The Place of a Skull,”	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to the place that the people called ‘The Place of a Skull,’ which the Jews call ‘Golgotha’ in Hebrew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	17	mwy4	figs-explicit	Ἑβραϊστὶ	1	to the place called “The Place of a Skull,”	See how you translated this phrase in [5:2](../05/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	17	hs8e		Γολγοθᾶ	1		Here John writes out the sounds of this Jewish Aramaic word using Greek letters. Since John translates the meaning earlier in the verse, you should write out this word using the most similar sounds in your language.
-JHN	19	18	fb84	figs-ellipsis	μετ’ αὐτοῦ ἄλλους δύο	1	with him two other men	John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “they also crucified two others with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	19	18	fb84	figs-ellipsis	μετ’ αὐτοῦ ἄλλους δύο	1	with him two other men	John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “they also crucified two others with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	19	19	cx5s	figs-explicit	ἔγραψεν…καὶ τίτλον ὁ Πειλᾶτος, καὶ ἔθηκεν ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ	1	Pilate also wrote a sign and put it on the cross	John uses **Pilate** to imply that **Pilate** ordered his soldiers to write the title and put it on the cross. Pilate probably would not have done this himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Pilate also commanded his soldiers to write a title on a sign and put it on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JHN	19	19	ziak	figs-explicit	ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ	1	Pilate also wrote a sign and put it on the cross	Here, **the cross** refers specifically to **the cross** on which Jesus was crucified. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the cross they used to crucify Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	19	ziak	figs-explicit	ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ	1	Pilate also wrote a sign and put it on the cross	Here, **the cross** refers specifically to **the cross** on which Jesus was crucified. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the cross they used to crucify Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	19	gk8e	figs-activepassive	ἦν…γεγραμμένον, Ἰησοῦς ὁ Ναζωραῖος, ὁ Βασιλεὺς τῶν Ἰουδαίων.	1	There it was written: JESUS OF NAZARETH, THE KING OF THE JEWS	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that person wrote on it these words: Jesus the Nazarene, the King of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	20	ke3t	figs-activepassive	ὁ τόπος…ὅπου ἐσταυρώθη ὁ Ἰησοῦς	1	the place where Jesus was crucified	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the place where they crucified Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	20	k3mp	figs-explicit	τῆς πόλεως	1	the place where Jesus was crucified	Here, **the city** refers to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the city called Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2437,7 +2437,7 @@ JHN	19	22	vgn9	figs-explicit	ὃ γέγραφα, γέγραφα	1	What I have wr
 JHN	19	23	s74c	figs-explicit	καὶ τὸν χιτῶνα	1	also the tunic	The next verse implies that the soldiers kept the tunic separate from the clothes that they divided. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the tunic they did not divide” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	23	lis8	writing-background	δὲ	1		There is a break from the main storyline that begins with the word **Now** and continues to the end of the next verse. In this break John tells us how this event fulfills Scripture. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	19	23	sk7l	figs-activepassive	ὑφαντὸς δι’ ὅλου	1	also the tunic	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone had woven it in one piece” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	19	24	ks7m	figs-ellipsis	λάχωμεν περὶ αὐτοῦ, τίνος ἔσται	1	let us cast lots for it to decide whose it will be	The soldiers are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. The soldiers will **cast lots** and the winner will receive the shirt. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “we should cast lots for it in order to decide whose it will be” or “we should cast lots for it and the winner will get to keep it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	19	24	ks7m	figs-ellipsis	λάχωμεν περὶ αὐτοῦ, τίνος ἔσται	1	let us cast lots for it to decide whose it will be	The soldiers are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. The soldiers will **cast lots** and the winner will receive the shirt. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “we should cast lots for it in order to decide whose it will be” or “we should cast lots for it and the winner will get to keep it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	19	24	umc2	translate-unknown	λάχωμεν περὶ αὐτοῦ…ἔβαλον κλῆρον	1	let us cast lots for it to decide whose it will be	The term **lots** refers to objects with different markings on various sides that were used to decide randomly among several possibilities. They were tossed onto the ground to see which marked side would come up on top. If your readers would not be familiar with **lots**, you could use a general expression for gambling. Alternate translation: “we should gamble for it … gambled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 JHN	19	24	us8x	writing-quotations	ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ ἡ λέγουσα	1	let us cast lots for it to decide whose it will be	Here John uses **that the scripture would be fulfilled** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 22:18](../../psa/22/18.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “This happened so that what is written in the Psalms might be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	19	24	j1f9	figs-activepassive	ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ ἡ λέγουσα	1	so that the scripture would be fulfilled which said	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “This fulfilled the scripture that said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2454,7 +2454,7 @@ JHN	19	27	qc7d	figs-metaphor	ἴδε, ἡ μήτηρ σου	1	See, your mother	H
 JHN	19	27	q615	figs-metonymy	ἀπ’ ἐκείνης τῆς ὥρας	1	From that hour	Here, **hour** refers to a point in time. It does not refer to a 60-minute length of time. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	19	28	uynk	writing-newevent	μετὰ τοῦτο	1	knowing that everything was now completed	**After this** introduces a new event that happened soon after the events the story has just told. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Soon afterward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 JHN	19	28	crd3	figs-activepassive	ἤδη πάντα τετέλεσται	1	knowing that everything was now completed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he had already completed all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	19	28	pxie	figs-explicit	πάντα	1	knowing that everything was now completed	Here, **all things** refers to everything that God sent Jesus to the world to do. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “all the things that God had sent him to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN	19	28	pxie	figs-explicit	πάντα	1	knowing that everything was now completed	Here, **all things** refers to everything that God sent Jesus to the world to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “all the things that God had sent him to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	19	28	wh4n	figs-activepassive	τελειωθῇ ἡ Γραφὴ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he might fulfill the scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	28	w999	writing-quotations	ἵνα τελειωθῇ ἡ Γραφὴ	1		Here John uses **that the scripture might be completed** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 69:21](../../psa/69/21.md)).If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “so that what is written in the Psalms might be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	19	28	ezfy	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
@@ -2477,7 +2477,7 @@ JHN	19	31	gz48	figs-explicit	κατεαγῶσιν αὐτῶν τὰ σκέλη
 JHN	19	32	q2yq	figs-activepassive	τοῦ ἄλλου τοῦ συνσταυρωθέντος αὐτῷ	1	who had been crucified with Jesus	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “of the other man with whom they had crucified him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	19	35	p17b	writing-background		0		This verse is a break from the main storyline in which John provides some background information about himself. John is telling readers that they can trust what he has written because he saw these events happen. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	19	35	bs5s	figs-123person	ὁ ἑωρακὼς…αὐτοῦ…ἐκεῖνος οἶδεν ὅτι ἀληθῆ λέγει	1	The one who saw this	This phrase refers to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. He is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the one who saw this … my … I know that I speak the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-JHN	19	35	c9q7	figs-ellipsis	ἵνα καὶ ὑμεῖς πιστεύητε	1	so that you would also believe	John is leaving out some of the words that this clause would need in many languages in order to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “so that you would also believe that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	19	35	c9q7	figs-ellipsis	ἵνα καὶ ὑμεῖς πιστεύητε	1	so that you would also believe	John is leaving out some of the words that this clause would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “so that you would also believe that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	19	36	wid6	writing-background		0	General Information:	[Verses 36–37](../19/36.md) are another break from the main storyline in which John tells us that the two events in [verses 33–34](../19/33.md) made some prophecies in scripture come true. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	19	36	uyvo	writing-quotations	ἐγένετο…ταῦτα, ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ	1	in order to fulfill scripture	Here John uses **that the scripture would be fulfilled** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 34:20](../../psa/34/20.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “these things happened in order that what is written in the Psalms might be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 JHN	19	36	l8zi	figs-explicit	ἐγένετο…ταῦτα	1	in order to fulfill scripture	Here, **these things** refers to the two events described in [verses 33–34](../19/33.md). If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the soldiers did not break Jesus’ legs but pierced his side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2538,8 +2538,8 @@ JHN	20	7	v9yg	translate-unknown	ὀθονίων	1		See how you translated **line
 JHN	20	7	yc78	figs-activepassive	ἀλλὰ χωρὶς ἐντετυλιγμένον εἰς ἕνα τόπον	1	but was folded up in a place by itself	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but someone had folded it up in one place by itself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	20	8	vl84	figs-explicit	ὁ ἄλλος μαθητὴς	1	the other disciple	See how you translated **the other disciple** in [verse 2](../20/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	20	8	b7h5	figs-123person	εἰσῆλθεν…καὶ εἶδεν καὶ ἐπίστευσεν	1	the other disciple	If you translated **the other disciple** with a first person form in this verse, then you will need to use the first person throughout this verse. Alternate translation: “went in, and I saw and believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-JHN	20	8	ww3z	figs-ellipsis	εἶδεν	1	he saw and believed	John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he saw the linen cloths where Jesus’ body had lain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	20	8	ww3z	figs-ellipsis	εἶδεν	1	he saw and believed	John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he saw the linen cloths where Jesus’ body had lain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-JHN	20	8	eydm	figs-ellipsis	ἐπίστευσεν	1	he saw and believed	John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he believed that Jesus had risen from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	20	8	eydm	figs-ellipsis	ἐπίστευσεν	1	he saw and believed	John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he believed that Jesus had risen from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	20	9	jywe	writing-background	γὰρ	1	they still did not know the scripture	**For** here indicates that this verse provides background information about the kind of belief that was mentioned in the previous clause. **For** here does not indicate a reason or cause. At that time, the disciples believed Jesus had risen from the dead only because the tomb was empty. They still did not understand that the scriptures said Jesus would rise from the dead. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “But even then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 JHN	20	9	u5q9	figs-idiom	ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῆναι	1	rise	Here, **rise from the dead** is an idiom that refers to a dead person becoming alive again. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “become alive after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	20	10	p5um	figs-explicit	ἀπῆλθον…πάλιν πρὸς αὑτοὺς	1	went back home again	Since the disciples were staying within walking distance of Jesus’ tomb, the **homes** they went to must have been in Jerusalem. They did not go back to their homes in Galilee. Alternate translation: “went back to where they were staying in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2567,7 +2567,7 @@ JHN	20	17	hogb	figs-pastforfuture	ἀναβαίνω	1	I will go up to my Father
 JHN	20	17	xbr1	figs-doublet	πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα μου, καὶ Πατέρα ὑμῶν, καὶ Θεόν μου, καὶ Θεὸν ὑμῶν	1	I will go up to my Father and your Father, and my God and your God	These two long phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize to whom Jesus will return. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “to God, who is my Father and your Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 JHN	20	18	unzu	figs-pastforfuture	ἔρχεται	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	20	18	m6xn	figs-go	ἔρχεται Μαριὰμ ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ	1	Mary Magdalene came and told the disciples	Your language may state “goes” rather than **comes** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “Mary Magdalene goes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-JHN	20	18	zf17	figs-ellipsis	ἔρχεται Μαριὰμ ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ	1	Mary Magdalene came and told the disciples	John is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Mary Magdalene comes to where the disciples were staying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	20	18	zf17	figs-ellipsis	ἔρχεται Μαριὰμ ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ	1	Mary Magdalene came and told the disciples	John is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Mary Magdalene comes to where the disciples were staying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	20	19	qj6n	figs-explicit	τῇ μιᾷ σαββάτων	1	that day, the first day of the week	See how you translated **the first of the week** in [verse 1](../20/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	20	19	hh2g	translate-ordinal	τῇ μιᾷ σαββάτων	1	that day, the first day of the week	Here John is actually using a cardinal number, “one,” to mean **first**. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can also use a cardinal number here in your translation. Alternate translation: “on day one of the week” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 JHN	20	19	e7cb	figs-activepassive	τῶν θυρῶν κεκλεισμένων ὅπου ἦσαν οἱ μαθηταὶ	1	the doors of where the disciples were, were closed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the disciples having closed the doors of where they were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2580,7 +2580,7 @@ JHN	20	20	nb0v	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἰδόντες τὸν Κύριον
 JHN	20	21	ylp8	figs-idiom	εἰρήνη ὑμῖν	1	Peace to you	See how you translated **Peace to you** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 JHN	20	21	env3	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατήρ	1	Father	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 JHN	20	21	hw1z	figs-infostructure	καθὼς ἀπέσταλκέν με ὁ Πατήρ, κἀγὼ πέμπω ὑμᾶς	1	Father	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “I send you just as the Father has sent me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-JHN	20	21	vhzq	figs-ellipsis	ἀπέσταλκέν με…πέμπω ὑμᾶς	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “has sent me into the world … send you into the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	20	21	vhzq	figs-ellipsis	ἀπέσταλκέν με…πέμπω ὑμᾶς	1		Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “has sent me into the world … send you into the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	20	22	vjs8	translate-symaction	ἐνεφύσησεν	1		When Jesus **breathed on them**, he did this symbolic action in order to show that he would give his disciples the **Holy Spirit** in the near future. If this would be helpful to your readers, you could explain its significance. Alternate translation: “he breathed on them as a symbolic action” or “he breathed on them to symbolically show that he was going to give them the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 JHN	20	22	avgi	figs-explicit	ἐνεφύσησεν	1		Here, **breathed on** refers to Jesus blowing air out of his mouth. It does not refer to the normal act of inhaling and exhaling air into one’s lungs. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he blew air on them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	20	22	v9el	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
@@ -2595,7 +2595,7 @@ JHN	20	25	n8vc	figs-infostructure	ἐὰν μὴ ἴδω ἐν ταῖς χερ
 JHN	20	25	i7ex	figs-doublenegatives	ἐὰν μὴ ἴδω ἐν ταῖς χερσὶν αὐτοῦ τὸν τύπον τῶν ἥλων, καὶ βάλω τὸν δάκτυλόν μου εἰς τὸν τύπον τῶν ἥλων, καὶ βάλω μου τὴν χεῖρα εἰς τὴν πλευρὰν αὐτοῦ, οὐ μὴ πιστεύσω	1	Unless I see … his side, I will not believe	If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “I will believe only if I see in his hands the mark of the nails and put my finger into the mark of the nails and put my hand into his side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 JHN	20	25	ss17	figs-possession	τὸν τύπον τῶν ἥλων	-1		In both of these occurrences, Thomas is using **of** to describe **mark** made by **nails**. He is referring to the holes in Jesus’ hands that were made by the nails that soldiers used to crucify him. Alternate translation: “the marks made by nails … those marks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 JHN	20	25	xasr	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὴν πλευρὰν αὐτοῦ	1		See how you translated **his side** in [verse 20](../20/20md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN	20	25	iqn0	figs-ellipsis	οὐ μὴ πιστεύσω	1		Thomas is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not believe that Jesus has become alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	20	25	iqn0	figs-ellipsis	οὐ μὴ πιστεύσω	1		Thomas is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not believe that Jesus has become alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	20	26	vzm5	figs-pastforfuture	ἔρχεται	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 JHN	20	26	r3iz	figs-activepassive	τῶν θυρῶν κεκλεισμένων	1	while the doors were closed	See how you translated this phrase in [verse 19](../20/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	20	26	m5tl	figs-idiom	εἰρήνη ὑμῖν	1	Peace to you	See how you translated **Peace to you** in [verse 19](../20/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -2604,11 +2604,11 @@ JHN	20	27	xgwl	figs-explicit	ὧδε	1		Jesus uses **here** to refer to the plac
 JHN	20	27	ai73	figs-metonymy	τὰς χεῖράς μου	1		Jesus uses **my hands** to refer to the holes in Jesus’ **hands** that were made by the nails that soldiers used to crucify him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the nail marks in my hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	20	27	tax6	figs-metonymy	τὴν πλευράν μου	1		Jesus uses **my side** to refer to the wound that a Roman soldier made in his **side** with a spear. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the spear wound in his side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 JHN	20	27	ncc3	figs-doublet	μὴ γίνου ἄπιστος, ἀλλὰ πιστός	1	Do not be unbelieving, but believe	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Jesus wants Thomas to believe that he has become alive again. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you absolutely must believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-JHN	20	27	n4pi	figs-ellipsis	μὴ γίνου ἄπιστος, ἀλλὰ πιστός	1	believe	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “do not be unbelieving that I have become alive again, but believe it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	20	27	n4pi	figs-ellipsis	μὴ γίνου ἄπιστος, ἀλλὰ πιστός	1	believe	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “do not be unbelieving that I have become alive again, but believe it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	20	29	zgv1	figs-pastforfuture	λέγει	1		Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-JHN	20	29	q81m	figs-ellipsis	πεπίστευκας…πιστεύσαντες	1	you have believed	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “you have believed that I have become alive again … having believed that I have become alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	20	29	q81m	figs-ellipsis	πεπίστευκας…πιστεύσαντες	1	you have believed	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “you have believed that I have become alive again … having believed that I have become alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	20	29	sax7	figs-activepassive	μακάριοι οἱ μὴ ἰδόντες	1	you have believed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God blesses those not having seen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-JHN	20	29	q9fb	figs-ellipsis	μὴ ἰδόντες	1	who have not seen	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “not having seen me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	20	29	q9fb	figs-ellipsis	μὴ ἰδόντες	1	who have not seen	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “not having seen me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	20	30	yd1j	writing-endofstory		0	General Information:	In [verses 30–31](../20/30.md) John comments about the story he has written in chapters 1 through 20. He also states his reason for writing this book. He does this in order to indicate that the story is almost finished. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
 JHN	20	30	azxu		σημεῖα	1		See how you translated the term **signs** in [2:11](../02/11.md). See also the discussion of **signs** in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles”
 JHN	20	30	xz6j	figs-activepassive	ἃ οὐκ ἔστιν γεγραμμένα ἐν τῷ βιβλίῳ τούτῳ	1	signs that have not been written in this book	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since John wrote this Gospel, you should use the first person pronoun “I” to indicate who did the action. Alternate translation: “which I have not written in this book” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2616,7 +2616,7 @@ JHN	20	31	zlc5	figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1		Here, **these things** could mean: (
 JHN	20	31	am9l	figs-activepassive	ταῦτα δὲ γέγραπται	1	but these have been written	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but the author wrote about these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 JHN	20	31	mlqg	figs-you	πιστεύητε…ἔχητε	1	but these have been written	In this verse **you** is plural and could refer to: (1) people who are reading this Gospel and do not trust in Jesus for salvation. Alternate translation: “you might believe … you might have” (2) people who are reading this Gospel and already believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “you would continue believing … you would continue to have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 JHN	20	31	p5k4	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Son of God	**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN	20	31	uem2	figs-ellipsis	πιστεύοντες	1	life in his name	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “believing that Jesus is the Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+JHN	20	31	uem2	figs-ellipsis	πιστεύοντες	1	life in his name	Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “believing that Jesus is the Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 JHN	20	31	ip1i	figs-explicit	ζωὴν	1	life	Here, **life** refers to eternal **life**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	20	31	vgwe	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **in** indicates the means by which people can have eternal **life**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of his name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 JHN	20	31	qxdy	figs-synecdoche	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ	1	life in his name	Here, **his name** could refer to: (1) Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “through union with him” or “by the power of his person” (2) calling on Jesus’ name for salvation. Alternate translation: “by calling on his name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])

en_tn_47-1CO.tsv

@@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	4	7	fnu3	figs-yousingular	σε…ἔχεις…ἔλαβες…ἔλαβες…καυχᾶσαι…λαβών	1	between you … do you have that you did not … you have freely … do you boast … you had not	In this verse, Paul uses the singular form for **you**. He does this in order to directly address each specific person among the Corinthian believers. In the next verse, he again uses the plural form of “you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 1CO	4	7	gtb5	figs-rquestion	τίς…σε διακρίνει?	1	For who makes you superior?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no one.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionas an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “there is no one who makes you superior.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	4	7	r6yw	figs-rquestion	τί…ἔχεις ὃ οὐκ ἔλαβες?	1	What do you have that you did not freely receive?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “nothing.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionas an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “there is nothing that you have that you did not receive.” or “you received everything that you have.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-1CO	4	7	eixw	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ δὲ καὶ ἔλαβες	1		Paul is speaking as if “receiving it” were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “And since you indeed received it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1CO	4	7	eixw	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ δὲ καὶ ἔλαβες	1		Paul is speaking as if “receiving it” were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “And since you indeed received it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1CO	4	7	e8l2	figs-rquestion	τί καυχᾶσαι ὡς μὴ λαβών?	1	why do you boast as if you had not done so?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. Here, there is no answer to the question, since that is exactly Paul’s point. There is no reason for them to **boast**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionas an imperative or a “should” statement. Alternate translation: “do not boast as if you did not receive it.” or “you should not boast as if you did not receive it.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	4	7	p0hg	writing-pronouns	ἔλαβες…λαβών	2		Here, both uses of **it** refer back to **what** the Corinthians **have**. If your language does not use **it** to refer to an unstated “thing,” you can use a word or phrase that does refer clearly back to **what** the Corinthians **have**. Alternate translation: “you received everything … you did … receive everything” or “you received what you have … you did … receive what you have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	4	8	yp8s	figs-irony	ἤδη κεκορεσμένοι ἐστέ, ἤδη ἐπλουτήσατε, χωρὶς ἡμῶν ἐβασιλεύσατε	1	General Information:	With these statements, Paul is stating what he thinks the Corinthians would say about themselves. He does not mean that he believes that these things are true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include some words that clarify that Paul is speaking from the Corinthians’s perspective, such as “it is as if” or “you say.” Alternate translation: “Already it is as if you are satisfied! Already it is as if you have become rich! It is as if you began to reign apart from us” or “Already you say that you are satisfied! Already you say that you have become rich! You say that you have begun to reign apart from us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
@@ -655,7 +655,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	6	2	r8sj	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἢ	1		The word **Or** introduces an alternate to what Paul speaks about in [6:1](../06/01.md). The Corinthians currently think that going to court in public is fine. Paul gives the true alternative: they **will judge the world** and thus should not need to take their quarrels and lawsuits anywhere else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Or** with a word that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. Alternate translation: “Rather,” or “On the other hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	6	2	i1m5	figs-rquestion	ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι οἱ ἅγιοι τὸν κόσμον κρινοῦσιν?	1	Or do you not know that the believers will judge the world?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionwith a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “You already know that the saints will judge the world.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	6	2	i67f	figs-rquestion	ἀνάξιοί ἐστε κριτηρίων ἐλαχίστων?	1	If then, you will judge the world, are you not able to settle matters of little importance?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionwith a strong negative or positive statement. Alternate translation: “you are definitely not unworthy of the smallest cases” or “you are definitely worthy of the smallest cases (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-1CO	6	2	py6h	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος	1		Paul is speaking as if **the world is judged by you** was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because the world is judged by you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1CO	6	2	py6h	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος	1		Paul is speaking as if **the world is judged by you** was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because the world is judged by you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1CO	6	2	yq8e	figs-activepassive	ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **the world**, which is **judged**, rather than **you**, who do the “judging.” Alternate translation: “you judge the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	6	2	jqvf	figs-pastforfuture	κρίνεται	1		Here, **is judged** makes a general statement about what **you**, that is, the **saints**, do. The present tense does not mean that the **saints** are currently passing final judgment and will not do so in the future. Rather, Paul uses the present tense to state a general fact about the **saints**. The judgment itself will occur in the future. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the present tense of **is judged** with the future tense here. Alternate translation: “will be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 1CO	6	2	stvc	figs-idiom	ἀνάξιοί…κριτηρίων ἐλαχίστων	1		Here, to be **unworthy of** something means that one is not capable of doing that thing or is not qualified to do it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **unworthy of** with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “unqualified concerning the smallest cases” “not able to judge the smallest cases” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1070,7 +1070,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	8	9	loo1		ἡ ἐξουσία ὑμῶν αὕτη	1	those who are weak	Alternate translation: “this authority that you have”
 1CO	8	9	f3ds	figs-metaphor	τοῖς ἀσθενέσιν	1	those who are weak	Much like in [8:7](../08/07.md), **weak** identifies a person who easily feels guilty. A **weak** person thinks some things are wrong that are probably acceptable before God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **weak** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “for the sensitive” or “for those who often condemn themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	8	9	deu5	figs-nominaladj	τοῖς ἀσθενέσιν	1	those who are weak	Paul is using the adjective **weak** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-1CO	8	10	usg7	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν…τις ἴδῃ	1	sees the one who has	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it will happen at some point. If your language does not state something as a condition if it will happen, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying might not happen, then you can introduce the clause by using a word such as “when” or “after”. Alternate translation: “whenever someone might see” or “after someone sees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1CO	8	10	usg7	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν…τις ἴδῃ	1	sees the one who has	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it will happen at some point. If your language does not state something as a condition if it will happen, and if your readers might  that what Paul is saying might not happen, then you can introduce the clause by using a word such as “when” or “after”. Alternate translation: “whenever someone might see” or “after someone sees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1CO	8	10	a7qn	figs-explicit	γνῶσιν	1	sees the one who has	Here Paul does not specify what the **knowledge** is about. However, it is clear from [8:4–6](../08/04.md) that Paul is speaking about **knowledge** about other gods, specifically knowing that there is only one God and that other gods do not really exist. If you must specify what the knowledge is about, you could clarify that it is about the idols or the topic of things sacrificed to idols. Alternate translation: “knowledge about idols” or “knowledge about this issue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	8	10	v611	figs-abstractnouns	τὸν ἔχοντα γνῶσιν	1	sees the one who has	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **knowledge**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “know.” Alternate translation: “the person who knows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	8	10	xhn9	translate-unknown	κατακείμενον	1	sees the one who has	In Paul’s culture, people ate lying down on their side (**reclining**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **reclining to eat** with a word or phrase that describes the normal position for eating in your culture or indicate that the person is about to eat. Alternate translation: “about to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -1096,7 +1096,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	8	12	x857	figs-metaphor	τὴν συνείδησιν ἀσθενοῦσαν	1	your knowledge	Here, **weak** identifies **consciences** that easily lead people to feel guilty. **Weak consciences** condemn some things that are probably acceptable before God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **weak** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “sensitive consciences” or “consciences, which often condemn them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	8	13	i8tb	figs-personification	βρῶμα σκανδαλίζει τὸν ἀδελφόν μου	1	Therefore	Here, **food** is spoken of as though it were a person who could cause someone **to stumble**. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that the **food** is the key issue that leads to “stumbling.” If this might be confusing for your readers, you could clarify that the person who eats the food causes someone **to stumble**. Alternate translation: “how I eat causes my brother to stumble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 1CO	8	13	seua	figs-123person	εἰ βρῶμα σκανδαλίζει τὸν ἀδελφόν μου, οὐ μὴ φάγω κρέα εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα	1	Therefore	Here Paul uses the first-person singular in order to use himself as an example for the Corinthians to follow. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that this is why Paul uses the first person by clarifying that Paul is offering himself as an example. Alternate translation: “if food causes my brother to stumble, I, for one, will certainly not ever eat meat” or “take me as an example: if food causes my brother to stumble, I will certainly not ever eat meat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-1CO	8	13	vf92	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ βρῶμα σκανδαλίζει τὸν ἀδελφόν μου	1	if food causes to stumble	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it will happen at some point. If your language does not state something as a condition if it will happen, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying might not happen, then you can introduce the clause by using a word such as “in cases where” or “since.” Alternate translation: “because food causes my brother to stumble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1CO	8	13	vf92	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ βρῶμα σκανδαλίζει τὸν ἀδελφόν μου	1	if food causes to stumble	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it will happen at some point. If your language does not state something as a condition if it will happen, and if your readers might  that what Paul is saying might not happen, then you can introduce the clause by using a word such as “in cases where” or “since.” Alternate translation: “because food causes my brother to stumble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1CO	8	13	eyrr	figs-gendernotations	τὸν ἀδελφόν	-1	Therefore	Although **brother** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brother** with a nongendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brother or sister … brother or sister” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	8	13	ucfd	figs-genericnoun	τὸν ἀδελφόν μου	-1	Therefore	Paul is speaking of “brothers” in general, not of one particular **brother**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **my brother** with a word or phrase that refers to “brothers” in general. Alternate translation: “any brother of mine … any brother of mine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1CO	8	13	ra1m	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μὴ	1	Therefore	The words translated **certainly not** are two negative words. In Paul’s culture, two negative words made the statement even more negative. English speakers would think that the two negatives form a positive, so the ULT expresses the idea with one strong negative. If your language can use two negatives as Paul’s culture did, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in this way, you can translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “by no means” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
@@ -1165,10 +1165,10 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	9	10	q1q2	figs-ellipsis	ὁ ἀλοῶν ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι	1	for our sake	Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the previous clause (**ought to plow**). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “the one who threshes ought to thresh in hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	9	11	zn5m	figs-metaphor	εἰ ἡμεῖς ὑμῖν τὰ πνευματικὰ ἐσπείραμεν, μέγα εἰ ἡμεῖς ὑμῶν τὰ σαρκικὰ θερίσομεν?	1	is it too much for us to reap material things from you?	In this verse, Paul applies the farming language he used in [9:9–10](../09/09.md). When he and Barnabas “sow,” they should also “reap” the harvest. Paul clarifies that what they **sowed** was **spiritual things**, which means the good news. The **material things** that they can **reap** are money and support from the Corinthians. If your reader would misunderstand this application of the farming language, you could use analogies to clarify what Paul is referring to or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “Similarly, if we told you about the good news, is it too much if we receive material support from you?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	9	11	b5g9	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	-1	is it too much for us to reap material things from you?	Here, **we** refers particularly to Paul and Barnabas. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-1CO	9	11	jpjj	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	is it too much for us to reap material things from you?	Paul is speaking as if **we** “sowing spiritual things” was a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” or “Given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1CO	9	11	jpjj	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	is it too much for us to reap material things from you?	Paul is speaking as if **we** “sowing spiritual things” was a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” or “Given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1CO	9	11	g1wh	figs-rquestion	μέγα εἰ ἡμεῖς ὑμῶν τὰ σαρκικὰ θερίσομεν?	1	is it too much for us to reap material things from you?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, it is not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionwith a strong negation. Alternate translation: “it is by no means too much if we will reap material things from you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	9	11	czcs	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ	2	is it too much for us to reap material things from you?	Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that **we** could **reap material things from you**, though **we** might not do so. He specifies the result for if **we** do **reap material things**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or “that.” Alternate translation: “that” or “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
-1CO	9	12	v333	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	If others exercised this right	Paul is speaking as if **others** “sharing” **the right over you** was a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” or “Given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1CO	9	12	v333	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	If others exercised this right	Paul is speaking as if **others** “sharing” **the right over you** was a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” or “Given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1CO	9	12	z3mr	figs-explicit	τῆς ὑμῶν ἐξουσίας μετέχουσιν	1	If others exercised this right	While Paul does not directly state this, the Corinthians would have understood **right** to refer to the **right** to receive financial support. If your readers would not understand **right** in this way, you could express the idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “shared the right to financial support from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	9	12	cr62	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ὑμῶν ἐξουσίας μετέχουσιν…ἡμεῖς…τῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ταύτῃ	1	If others exercised this right	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **right**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “able to.” If you do so, you may need to express an object, which here is receiving financial support. Alternate translation: “were able to require financial support from you, are we … being able to require financial support from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	9	12	lld4	figs-rquestion	οὐ μᾶλλον ἡμεῖς?	1	If others exercised this right over you, should we not even more?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, you do.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionwith a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “we certainly do even more.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -1196,7 +1196,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	9	15	fd69	figs-metaphor	τὸ καύχημά μου…κενώσει	1	deprive me of my boasting	Here Paul speaks as if a **boast** was a container that someone could make **empty**. By speaking in this way, Paul means that someone could take away what he boasts about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **make my boast empty** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “will remove my reason for boasting” or “will deflate my boast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	9	15	rl1y	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ καύχημά μου	1	deprive me of my boasting	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **boast**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “boast.” Alternate translation: “what I boast about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	9	16	lq4l	figs-infostructure	ἐὰν…εὐαγγελίζωμαι, οὐκ ἔστιν μοι καύχημα, ἀνάγκη γάρ μοι ἐπίκειται	1	this necessity was placed upon me	If your language would normally put the reason before the result, you could rearrange the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “because compulsion is placed on me, there is nothing for me to boast about if I proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-1CO	9	16	xpve	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν	1	this necessity was placed upon me	Paul is speaking as if “proclaiming” **the gospel** was only a possibility, but he means that he actually does this. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when” or “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1CO	9	16	xpve	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν	1	this necessity was placed upon me	Paul is speaking as if “proclaiming” **the gospel** was only a possibility, but he means that he actually does this. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when” or “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1CO	9	16	ecw2	figs-activepassive	ἀνάγκη…ἐπίκειται	1	this necessity was placed upon me	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on himself, upon whom the **compulsion is placed**, rather than focusing on the person placing the **compulsion**. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God places compulsion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	9	16	qyp0	figs-abstractnouns	ἀνάγκη…μοι ἐπίκειται	1	this necessity was placed upon me	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **compulsion**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “compel” and rephrase the clause. Alternate translation: “I am compelled to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	9	16	eimr	figs-metaphor	ἀνάγκη…μοι ἐπίκειται	1	this necessity was placed upon me	Here Paul speaks as if **compulsion** were a physical object that someone had **placed upon** him. By speaking in this way, he means that he is required to do something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I am commanded to do so” or “I have an obligation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1341,7 +1341,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	10	14	dab4	figs-activepassive	ἀγαπητοί μου	1	Connecting Statement:	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **beloved** rather than focusing on the person doing the “loving.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that he himself loves them. Alternate translation: “people whom I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	10	14	n5tb	figs-metaphor	φεύγετε ἀπὸ	1	flee away from idolatry	Just as in [6:18](../06/18.md), here Paul wants the Corinthians to avoid **idolatry** as urgently as if it were an enemy or danger that they might **flee from**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “carefully stay away from” or “fight against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	10	14	ly4k	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς εἰδωλολατρίας	1	flee away from idolatry	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **idolatry**, you can express the idea by using a phrase such as “worshiping other gods” or “serving idols.” Alternate translation: “serving idols” or “worshiping idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO	10	15	ed82	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ὡς φρονίμοις	1	flee away from idolatry	Paul here uses **as**, but he means that he thinks he really is speaking to **sensible people**. If your language does not use **as** if what it introduces is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can express the idea by identifying the Corinthians as **sensible people**. Alternate translation: “to you like this because you are sensible people” Corinthians as **sensible people**. Alternate translation: “to you like this because you are sensible people” or “like someone who is talking to reasonable people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1CO	10	15	ed82	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ὡς φρονίμοις	1	flee away from idolatry	Paul here uses **as**, but he means that he thinks he really is speaking to **sensible people**. If your language does not use **as** if what it introduces is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can express the idea by identifying the Corinthians as **sensible people**. Alternate translation: “to you like this because you are sensible people” Corinthians as **sensible people**. Alternate translation: “to you like this because you are sensible people” or “like someone who is talking to reasonable people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1CO	10	15	mnb2	writing-pronouns	ὅ φημι	1	flee away from idolatry	Here, **what I say** refers to what Paul is about to say in the next verses (especially [10:16–22](../10/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **what I say** with a form that naturally refers to the next sentences. Alternate translation: “what I will say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	10	16	gi4s	figs-possession	τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας	1	The cup of blessing	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **cup** that is characterized by **blessing**. This phrase identifies a specific **cup**, here, the **cup** used in the Lord’s Supper. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you can identify the **cup** as the one used in the Lord’s Supper. Alternate translation: “The cup in the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 1CO	10	16	tavb	figs-metonymy	τὸ ποτήριον	1	The cup of blessing	Here the Corinthians would have understood **cup** to refer to the drink inside the **cup**, which in Paul’s culture would have been wine. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **cup** by more explicitly referring to what would be in the **cup**. Alternate translation: “The drink” or “The wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1384,7 +1384,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	10	24	bpf8	figs-imperative	μηδεὶς…ζητείτω	1	not everything builds people up	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “No one should seek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 1CO	10	24	i6ek	figs-gendernotations	ἑαυτοῦ	1	not everything builds people up	Here, **his** is written in masculine form, but it refers to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **his**by using a word that does not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “his or her own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1CO	10	24	mcwj	figs-possession	τὸ ἑαυτοῦ…ἀλλὰ τὸ τοῦ ἑτέρου	1	not everything builds people up	Here Paul speaks of a **good** that belongs to oneself or to another person. By this, he refers to what is **good** for oneself or for **the other person**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you can clarify that the **good** is “for” somebody. Alternate translation: “what is good for himself, but what is good for the other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-1CO	10	24	pn70	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ τὸ τοῦ ἑτέρου	1	not everything builds people up	This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “but let each person seek the good of the other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1CO	10	24	pn70	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ τὸ τοῦ ἑτέρου	1	not everything builds people up	This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “but let each person seek the good of the other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	10	24	dppr	figs-genericnoun	τοῦ ἑτέρου	1	not everything builds people up	Paul is speaking of other people in general, not of one particular **other person**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the other person** with a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “of every other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
 1CO	10	25	djh4	figs-explicit	ἐν μακέλλῳ	1	not everything builds people up	Here, **the market** is the public place where meat and other foods were **sold**. At least sometimes, meat that came from sacrifices to idols would be sold in this **market**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a footnote to explain the context and say why Paul is speaking about **the market**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	10	25	m6w7	figs-activepassive	πωλούμενον	1	not everything builds people up	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what is **sold** rather than focusing on the person doing the “selling.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “butchers” or “sellers” do it. Alternate translation: “butchers sell” or “people sell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1425,7 +1425,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	10	30	dv5f	figs-rquestion	τί βλασφημοῦμαι ὑπὲρ οὗ ἐγὼ εὐχαριστῶ?	1	If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “you should not be.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionwith a strong negation. Alternate translation: “I must not be insulted for that which I give thanks.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	10	30	bafd	figs-activepassive	βλασφημοῦμαι	1	If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks?	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on himself, who is **insulted**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “insulting.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that some other person does it. Alternate translation: “do they insult me” or “does someone insult me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	10	31	ub3g	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks?	Here, **Therefore** introduces the conclusion of what Paul has argued in [8:1–10:30](../08/01.md). If you have a way to introduce the conclusion to an entire section, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “In conclusion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1CO	10	31	pxzd	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴτε…ἐσθίετε, εἴτε πίνετε, εἴτε τι ποιεῖτε	1	If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks?	Paul is speaking as if “eating,” “drinking,” and “doing” things were hypothetical possibilities, but he means that the Corinthians will do these things. If your language does not state something as a possibility if it is certain or true and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when you eat or drink, or when you do anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1CO	10	31	pxzd	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴτε…ἐσθίετε, εἴτε πίνετε, εἴτε τι ποιεῖτε	1	If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks?	Paul is speaking as if “eating,” “drinking,” and “doing” things were hypothetical possibilities, but he means that the Corinthians will do these things. If your language does not state something as a possibility if it is certain or true and if your readers might  that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when you eat or drink, or when you do anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1CO	10	31	zmvv	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς δόξαν Θεοῦ	1	If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks?	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “glorify.” Alternate translation: “to glorify God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	10	32	sj34	figs-abstractnouns	ἀπρόσκοποι καὶ Ἰουδαίοις γίνεσθε, καὶ Ἕλλησιν, καὶ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **offense**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “offend.” Alternate translation: “Do not offend either Jews or Greeks or the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1CO	10	32	ag47	figs-explicit	καὶ Ἰουδαίοις…καὶ Ἕλλησιν, καὶ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks	Here the three groups to which Paul refers would include every person in Paul’s context. The **Jews** are those who practice Jewish customs and faith, while **the church of God** refers to everyone who believes in Jesus the Messiah. The word **Greeks** includes everyone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these three groups and think that Paul is leaving some people out by clarifying that Paul includes everyone. Alternate translation: “to anyone, whether Jews or Greeks or the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1463,7 +1463,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	11	6	lac8	figs-explicit	οὐ κατακαλύπτεται…κατακαλυπτέσθω	1	If it is disgraceful for a woman	Just as in [11:5](../11/05.md), **not** “covering” the **head** could refer to: (1) not wearing a piece of clothing on the hair and back of the head. Alternate translation: “does not wear a cloth on her head … let her wear a cloth on her head” (2) not putting the hair up in a traditional hairstyle but instead letting it flow freely. Alternate translation: “loosens her hair … let her bind up her hair” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	11	6	ahln	figs-imperative	καὶ κειράσθω	1	If it is disgraceful for a woman	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “needs to.” Alternate translation: “her hair also needs to be cut off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 1CO	11	6	i9ou	figs-activepassive	καὶ κειράσθω	1	If it is disgraceful for a woman	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **hair**, which is **cut off**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “cutting.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “someone” does it. Alternate translation: “let a person cut her hair off also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1CO	11	6	s4r5	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	2	If it is disgraceful for a woman	Paul is speaking as if this was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because it is” or “since it is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1CO	11	6	s4r5	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	2	If it is disgraceful for a woman	Paul is speaking as if this was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because it is” or “since it is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1CO	11	6	lqlu	figs-doublet	τὸ κείρασθαι ἢ ξυρᾶσθαι	1	If it is disgraceful for a woman	Here, **to have her hair cut off** refers to how **hair** is trimmed or cut much shorter. The phrase **to be shaved** refers to how **hair** can be cut so short that it is no longer visible. If your language has separate words for these two actions, you could use them here. If your language has only one word for cutting **hair** short, you could use just one word here. Alternate translation: “to have her hair cut short” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1CO	11	6	pflq	figs-activepassive	τὸ κείρασθαι ἢ ξυρᾶσθαι	1	If it is disgraceful for a woman	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **hair** that is **cut off** or **shaved** rather than focusing on the person doing the “cutting” or “shaving.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “someone” does it. Alternate translation: “to have someone cut her hair off or to shave her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	11	6	od1s	figs-imperative	κατακαλυπτέσθω	1	If it is disgraceful for a woman	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “needs to.” Alternate translation: “she needs to cover her head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
@@ -1550,7 +1550,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	11	22	d2cm	figs-hyperbole	τοὺς μὴ ἔχοντας	1	despise	Here, **those who have nothing** is an exaggeration that the Corinthians would have understood to mean that these people do not **have** very much. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize the contrast between those who **have houses** and those who **have nothing**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could qualify Paul’s claim and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “those who have very little” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 1CO	11	22	nz88	figs-rquestion	τί εἴπω ὑμῖν?	1	What should I say to you? Should I praise you?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “we know that you are going to rebuke us.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionwith a strong statement about what Paul is going to say. Alternate translation: “You know what I am going to say to you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1CO	11	22	uv6z	figs-rquestion	ἐπαινέσω ὑμᾶς ἐν τούτῳ?	1	What should I say to you? Should I praise you?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, you should not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionwith a strong negation. Alternate translation: “I will definitely not praise you for this.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-1CO	11	22	qc27	figs-doublet	ἐπαινέσω ὑμᾶς ἐν τούτῳ? οὐκ ἐπαινῶ!	1	What should I say to you? Should I praise you?	Here Paul indicates that he will **not praise** the Corinthians by using both a rhetorical question and a negative statement. He uses both sentences in order to strongly emphasize how displeased he is. If your language does not use repetition for emphasis, and if your readers might misunderstand why Paul repeats the same idea, you can combine these two sentences into one strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “I will never praise you for this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+1CO	11	22	qc27	figs-doublet	ἐπαινέσω ὑμᾶς ἐν τούτῳ? οὐκ ἐπαινῶ!	1	What should I say to you? Should I praise you?	Here Paul indicates that he will **not praise** the Corinthians by using both a rhetorical question and a negative statement. He uses both sentences in order to strongly emphasize how displeased he is. If your language does not use repetition for emphasis, and if your readers would not understand why Paul repeats the same idea, you could combine these two sentences into one strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “I will never praise you for this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1CO	11	23	av31		ἐγὼ…παρέλαβον ἀπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου, ὃ	1	For I received from the Lord what I also passed on to you, that the Lord	This could refer to: (1) how Paul learned the tradition he is about to recount indirectly **from the Lord**. In other words, Paul learns about these things from others, who received the tradition directly from the Lord. Alternate translation: “from others who knew the Lord I received what the Lord himself did, which” (2) how Paul learned the tradition directly **from the Lord**. In other words, **the Lord** himself revealed this information to Paul. Alternate translation: “I received directly from the Lord what”
 1CO	11	23	xgh4	translate-unknown	ἐν τῇ νυκτὶ ᾗ	1	For I received from the Lord what I also passed on to you, that the Lord	Here, **on the night** states that the events that Paul will describe all happened “during” one specific **night**. Use a natural way to refer to “during the night” as the time in which the events occur. Alternate translation: “during the night when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	11	23	iy93	figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ νυκτὶ ᾗ παρεδίδετο	1	For I received from the Lord what I also passed on to you, that the Lord	Here Paul refers to the story about how Jesus was arrested. One of Jesus’ closest disciples, Judas Iscariot, made a deal with the religious leaders to “betray” Jesus to them (see [Matthew 26:14–16](../mat/26/14.md); [Mark 14:10–11](../mrk/14/10.md); [Luke 22:3–6](../luk/22/03.md)). After Jesus eats with his disciples and spends time praying, Judas leads the religious leaders to Jesus, and they arrest him (see [Matthew 26:47–50](../mat/26/47.md); [Mark 14:43–46](../mrk/14/43.md); [Luke 22:47–48](../luk/22/47.md); [John 18:2–12](../jhn/18/02.md)). Paul is not primarily interested in this part of the story, but he mentions it to explain when Jesus **took bread**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what **on the night in which he was betrayed** refers to with a footnote to explain the context or include some short, extra information. Alternate translation: “on the night in which he was handed over to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1979,14 +1979,14 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	14	26	xzz2	figs-imperative	πάντα πρὸς οἰκοδομὴν γινέσθω	1	interpretation	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “All things must happen for building up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 1CO	14	26	fnba	figs-metaphor	οἰκοδομὴν	1	interpretation	Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one “builds up.” With this metaphor, he emphasizes that the Corinthians should focus on helping other believers become stronger and more mature, just like the one who builds a house makes it strong and complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. See how you translated this metaphor in [14:12](../14/12.md). Alternate translation: “the growth” or “the edification” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	14	26	jvgw	figs-explicit	πρὸς οἰκοδομὴν	1	interpretation	Here the Corinthians would have understood Paul to mean that the **building up** applies to other believers. If your readers would not infer this, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “for building up believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	14	27	u8ew	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴτε	1	and each one in turn	Paul is speaking as if someone “speaking” **in a tongue** was a hypothetical possibility, but he knows that someone often does “speak” **in a tongue**. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can express the idea with a word that refers to a situation rather than to a possibility. Alternate translation: “Whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1CO	14	27	u8ew	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴτε	1	and each one in turn	Paul is speaking as if someone “speaking” **in a tongue** was a hypothetical possibility, but he knows that someone often does “speak” **in a tongue**. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can express the idea with a word that refers to a situation rather than to a possibility. Alternate translation: “Whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1CO	14	27	gqdr	figs-ellipsis	κατὰ	1	and each one in turn	Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a complete thought. English needs these words, so the ULT has supplied them in brackets. If your language also needs these words, you could use these or similar ones. Alternate translation: “this should be done by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1CO	14	27	qhl3	figs-explicit	κατὰ δύο ἢ τὸ πλεῖστον τρεῖς	1	and each one in turn	Paul does not explicitly state in what situation only **two or at most three** believers should speak **in a tongue**. The Corinthians would have understood him to be speaking about each time the believers gathered to worship God (see the expression “in the church” in [14:28](../14/28.md)). Paul does not mean that only **two or most three** people can ever speak in tongues. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what situation Paul is speaking about more explicitly. Alternate translation: “it should be by two or at most three every time you gather together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	14	27	wc1z	figs-idiom	ἀνὰ μέρος	1	and each one in turn	Here, **in turn** means that people do something one after the other or in order. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in turn** with a word or phrase that refers to doing things successively or in order. Alternate translation: “in order” or “successively” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	14	27	njmu	figs-imperative	εἷς διερμηνευέτω	1	and each one in turn	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “let.” Alternate translation: “one should interpret” or “let one interpret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 1CO	14	27	vvge	figs-extrainfo	εἷς	1	and each one in turn	Here Paul does not indicate whether **one** is one of the people who is speaking **in a tongue** or if it is someone else. It is likely that Paul thinks that both options are acceptable. If possible, you should translate **one** in such a way that it could refer to one of the people speaking **in a tongue** or to someone else. Alternate translation: “somebody” or “one person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 1CO	14	27	ari2	figs-explicit	διερμηνευέτω	1	must interpret	Here, just as in [14:26](../14/26.md), **interpret** refers specifically to interpreting a **tongue**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that the person should **interpret** the **tongue**. Alternate translation: “must interpret the tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1CO	14	28	rlag	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν	1	must interpret	Much like in [14:27](../14/27.md), Paul is speaking as if **an interpreter** not being present was a hypothetical possibility, but he knows that sometimes this is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can express the idea with a word that refers to a situation rather than to a possibility. Alternate translation: “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1CO	14	28	rlag	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν	1	must interpret	Much like in [14:27](../14/27.md), Paul is speaking as if **an interpreter** not being present was a hypothetical possibility, but he knows that sometimes this is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can express the idea with a word that refers to a situation rather than to a possibility. Alternate translation: “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1CO	14	28	bkc6	figs-explicit	διερμηνευτής	1	must interpret	Here, much like in [14:26–27](../14/26.md), **interpreter** refers specifically to someone who can interpret a tongue. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that the **interpreter** is the person who “interprets” the tongue. Alternate translation: “an interpreter for the tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	14	28	znt9	figs-extrainfo	μὴ ᾖ διερμηνευτής	1	must interpret	Just as in [14:27](../14/27.md), the **interpreter** could be someone who speaks in tongues or some other person. If possible, you should translate **an interpreter** in such a way that it could refer to one of the people speaking in a tongue or to someone else. Alternate translation: “no one can interpret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 1CO	14	28	u0ia	figs-gendernotations	σιγάτω…ἑαυτῷ…λαλείτω	1	must interpret	Although **him** and **himself** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **him** and **himself** with nongendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “let him or her be silent … let him or speak to himself or herself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
@@ -2114,7 +2114,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	15	11	uoji	writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνοι	1	the grace of God that is with me	Here, just as in [15:10](../15/10.md), **they** refers back to the “apostles” that Paul mentions in [15:9](../15/09.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this reference by referring explicitly to “apostles” here. Alternate translation: “other apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	15	11	vqai	writing-pronouns	οὕτως κηρύσσομεν, καὶ οὕτως ἐπιστεύσατε	1	the grace of God that is with me	In both places, **in this way** could refer to: (1) the gospel as Paul has outlined it in [15:3–8](../15/03.md). Alternate translation: “it is this gospel that we preach, and it is this gospel that you believed” (2) the “grace” that Paul discussed in the last verse ([15:10](../15/10.md)). Alternate translation: “by God’s grace we preach, and by God’s grace you believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1CO	15	11	z7b6	figs-exclusive	κηρύσσομεν	1	the grace of God that is with me	Here, **we** refers to **I** and **they** earlier in the sentence. It includes Paul and other apostles but not the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-1CO	15	12	h62z	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	how can some of you say there is no resurrection of the dead?	Paul is speaking as if this was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “because.” Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1CO	15	12	h62z	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	how can some of you say there is no resurrection of the dead?	Paul is speaking as if this was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “because.” Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1CO	15	12	k9rb		εἰ…Χριστὸς κηρύσσεται, ὅτι ἐκ νεκρῶν ἐγήγερται	1	how can some of you say there is no resurrection of the dead?	Alternate translation: “if it is proclaimed that Christ was raised from the dead”
 1CO	15	12	jhia	figs-activepassive	Χριστὸς κηρύσσεται	1	how can some of you say there is no resurrection of the dead?	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that anyone who preaches the gospel does it, particularly he and other “apostles.” Alternate translation: “we proclaim Christ, specifically” or “believing preachers proclaim Christ, specifically” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	15	12	jbi8	figs-idiom	ἐγήγερται	1	raised	Here, **raised** refers to someone who died and comes back to life. If your language does not use **raised** to describe coming back to life, you can use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “he was restored to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -2249,7 +2249,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	15	32	ghif	figs-infostructure	εἰ κατὰ ἄνθρωπον, ἐθηριομάχησα	1	What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised	Here, **according to men** could modify: (1) **I fought**. In this case, Paul would be fighting with merely human goals and strategies. Alternate translation: “if I fought according to men against wild beasts” (2) **wild beasts**. In this case, Paul would be identifying the phrase **wild beasts** as a figurative reference to his enemies. Alternate translation: “if I fought wild beasts, speaking,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1CO	15	32	vslh	figs-idiom	κατὰ ἄνθρωπον	1	What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised	Here, **according to men** identifies thinking or acting in only human ways. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **according to men**by using a word or phrase that refers to what people who do not believe say and argue. Alternate translation: “according to what mere humans think” or “according to this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1CO	15	32	rqte	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπον	1	What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised	Although **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **men** with a nongendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “humans” or “men and women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-1CO	15	32	wvra	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised	Paul is speaking as if fighting **wild beasts** was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it actually happened. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying did not happen, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “when.” Alternate translation: “when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1CO	15	32	wvra	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised	Paul is speaking as if fighting **wild beasts** was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it actually happened. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Paul is saying did not happen, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “when.” Alternate translation: “when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1CO	15	32	lm3v	figs-metaphor	ἐθηριομάχησα	1	I fought with beasts at Ephesus	Here, the **wild beasts** could be: (1) a figurative reference to enemies, who acted like **wild beasts**. In support of this is the fact that, except for this verse, the Bible does not talk about Paul fighting **wild beasts**. Alternate translation: “I fought savage enemies” or “I strove with opponents as fierce as wild beasts” (2) a literal reference to fighting **wild** animals. Alternate translation: “I fought against wild animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1CO	15	32	maht	translate-unknown	ἐν Ἐφέσῳ	1	I fought with beasts at Ephesus	**Ephesus** was a city on the west coast of what is now Turkey. Paul spent time there soon after leaving Corinth (see [Acts 18:19–21](../act/18/19.md)). After some more travels, he visited **Ephesus** and stayed there for more than two years ( [Acts 19:1–20:1](../act/19/01.md)). Neither story mentions **wild beasts**, and Paul does not clarify which visit he is speaking about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Ephesus** with a word or phrase that more clearly identifies it as a city that Paul visited. Alternate translation: “in Ephesus city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	15	32	nu0s	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται	1	I fought with beasts at Ephesus	Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **the dead** really are **raised**. He uses this form to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim that **the dead are not raised**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If the dead actually are not raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
@@ -2318,7 +2318,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	15	44	b4dm	figs-activepassive	σπείρεται…ἐγείρεται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the body that **is sown** and **raised** rather than focusing on the people who do those actions. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “people” do the sowing and “God” does the raising. Alternate translation: “People sow it as … God raises it as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1CO	15	44	f93u	translate-unknown	σῶμα ψυχικόν	-1		Here, **natural body** refers to human bodies before they are **raised**. These bodies are those that function in the ways that we can observe right now and that fit with life on earth right now. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **natural body** with a word or phrase that refers to human bodies as they currently exist on earth before God transforms them. Alternate translation: “a this-worldly body … a this-worldly body” or “a regular body … a regular body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 1CO	15	44	n07f	translate-unknown	σῶμα πνευματικόν…πνευματικόν	1		Here, **spiritual body** refers to human bodies after they are **raised**. It could specifically refer to: (1) how the **body** is controlled by God’s Spirit and thus fits with how people will live when God renews everything he has created. Alternate translation: “a body fit for the new creation … a body fit for the new creation” or “a body controlled by God’s Spirit … a body controlled by God’s Spirit” (2) how the **body** is made out of “spirit” as opposed to “soul” or “flesh.” Alternate translation: “a body made out of spirit … a body made out of spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1CO	15	44	ktad	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1		Paul is speaking as if the **natural body** was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “because.” Alternate translation: “Since” or “Because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1CO	15	44	ktad	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1		Paul is speaking as if the **natural body** was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “because.” Alternate translation: “Since” or “Because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1CO	15	45	zsb9	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὕτως καὶ	1		Here, **So also** introduces the basis for the claim Paul made about the existence of both “natural” and “spiritual” bodies in the last verse ([15:44](../15/44.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **So also** with a word or phrase that introduces evidence or support. Alternate translation: “For” or “As” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1CO	15	45	y5c0	writing-quotations	γέγραπται	1		In Paul’s culture, **it is written** was a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text. In this case, the quotation comes from [Genesis 2:7](../gen/02/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how Paul introduces the quotation with a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it can be read in Genesis” or “the author of the book of Genesis says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 1CO	15	45	f507	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what **is written** rather than focusing on the person doing the “writing.” If you must state who does the action, you can express it so that: (1) the scripture author writes or speaks the words. Alternate translation: “Moses has written” (2) God speaks the words. Alternate translation: “God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2465,7 +2465,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1CO	16	9	px3c	figs-explicit	θύρα…ἀνέῳγεν μεγάλη καὶ ἐνεργής	1	a wide door has opened	Here Paul speaks as if the **door** opens itself, but he implies that “God” is the one who has opened the door. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how the **door has opened** by clarifying that God opens it. Alternate translation: “God has opened a wide and effective door” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1CO	16	9	wsc0	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	2	a wide door has opened	Here, **and** could introduce: (1) another reason why Paul plans on staying in Ephesus. In other words, he stays both to take advantage of the “open door” and because he needs to resist those who “oppose” him. Alternate translation: “and also” (2) a potential reason why Paul would not stay in Ephesus. Paul would be saying that the “open door” is enough reason to stay even though there are **many** who “oppose” him. Alternate translation: “even though” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 1CO	16	9	ycte	figs-nominaladj	πολλοί	1	a wide door has opened	Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-1CO	16	10	axhg	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν…ἔλθῃ Τιμόθεος	1	see that he is with you unafraid	Paul is speaking as if **Timothy** coming was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. He has already stated that he has sent Timothy to the Corinthians (see [4:17](../04/17.md)). He uses **if** here to indicate that he is not sure when Timothy will arrive, not that he is unsure if Timothy will arrive at all. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. If possible, include the idea that the time of Timothy’s arrival is uncertain. Alternate translation: “when Timothy eventually comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1CO	16	10	axhg	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν…ἔλθῃ Τιμόθεος	1	see that he is with you unafraid	Paul is speaking as if **Timothy** coming was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. He has already stated that he has sent Timothy to the Corinthians (see [4:17](../04/17.md)). He uses **if** here to indicate that he is not sure when Timothy will arrive, not that he is unsure if Timothy will arrive at all. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. If possible, include the idea that the time of Timothy’s arrival is uncertain. Alternate translation: “when Timothy eventually comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1CO	16	10	as9e	translate-names	Τιμόθεος	1	see that he is with you unafraid	**Timothy** is the name of a man. He was one of Paul’s closest and most trusted companions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 1CO	16	10	b83r	figs-go	ἔλθῃ	1	see that he is with you unafraid	Here Paul is speaking about how Timothy will visit the Corinthians. Use a word in your language that refers to a person arriving where someone lives to visit them. Alternate translation: “visits you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 1CO	16	10	p6vb	figs-idiom	βλέπετε ἵνα	1	see that he is with you unafraid	Here, **see that** refers to carefully doing something or making sure that something happens. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **see that** with a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “ensure that” or “be careful that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])

en_tn_53-1TH.tsv

@@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	3	8	utk3	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι νῦν ζῶμεν, ἐὰν ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	if you stand firm in the Lord	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Since you are remaining faithful to the Lord Jesus, we are now refreshed!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1TH	3	8	y1vb	figs-hyperbole	ὅτι νῦν ζῶμεν	1	we live	Here, **For now we live** is an exaggeration that Paul uses to show how thankful he is that the Thessalonians **stand firm** in the Christian faith (See [3:7](../03/07.md)). Paul is not trying to say that he was dead. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows thankfulness. Alternate translation (replace the comma): “O how we are now refreshed!” or “O how we now feel alive!” or “Certainly now we thrive!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 1TH	3	8	x4zn	figs-idiom	ἐὰν ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	if you stand firm in the Lord	Here, the term **stand firm** is an idiom meaning “remain faithful.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “when you remain faithful to the Lord” or “if you continue unwavering in your relationship with the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1TH	3	8	zbyo	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	if you stand firm in the Lord	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you are remaining faithful to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1TH	3	8	zbyo	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	if you stand firm in the Lord	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you are remaining faithful to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1TH	3	8	hk91	figs-metaphor	ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	if you stand firm in the Lord	Paul speaks of the Thessalonian church as though they were occupying space inside the Lord Jesus. Here, this metaphor, **in the Lord**, could express these ideas: (1) devotion to Jesus. Alternate translation: “you are really devoted to the Lord Jesus” (2) relationship with Jesus. Alternate translation: “you are truly standing firm in your relationship with the Lord Jesus” (3) union with Jesus. Alternate translation: “all of you are firmly united to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	3	8	e3pe	figs-rpronouns	ὑμεῖς	1	if you stand firm in the Lord	Paul uses the word **yourselves** to emphasize his joy for the Thessalonian church’s faithfulness. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternative translation: “indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 1TH	3	9	pzq7	figs-rquestion	τίνα γὰρ εὐχαριστίαν δυνάμεθα τῷ Θεῷ ἀνταποδοῦναι περὶ ὑμῶν, ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ χαρᾷ ᾗ χαίρομεν δι’ ὑμᾶς, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν.	1	For what thanks are we able to give back to God concerning you, for all the joy in which we rejoice before our God because of you,	Paul is using a rhetorical question that continues to the end of [3:10](../03/10.md) in order to emphasize the apostles’ thankful joy for the Thessalonian church’s faithfulness to God. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We could not possibly thank God enough for what he has done for you! When we pray to our God, we greatly rejoice because of you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	4	13	r9f8	figs-nominaladj	καθὼς καὶ οἱ λοιποὶ	1	so that you may not grieve just as also the rest	Paul is using the adjective phrase **the rest** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “like the rest of people” or “in the same way as the rest of humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 1TH	4	13	f9eq	figs-explicit	οἱ μὴ ἔχοντες ἐλπίδα	1	so that you may not grieve just as also the rest	Here Paul assumes that his readers will know that **hope** refers to salvation at the final resurrection (See [1:3; 2:19; 4:16; 5:8](../01/03.md)). Previously **hope** was associated with the Second Coming of Christ in [2:19](../02/19.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “who possess no confidence of life after death” or “who possess no assurance of life after death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1TH	4	13	puvg	figs-abstractnouns	οἱ μὴ ἔχοντες ἐλπίδα	1	so that you may not grieve just as also the rest	If your language does not use the abstract noun **hope**, you can express the idea behind it in another way. Alternate translation: “who are not confident of life after death” “who are not sure about life after death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1TH	4	14	j09o	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ γὰρ πιστεύομεν ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἀπέθανεν καὶ ἀνέστη	1	if we believe	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he actually means that it is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think what the apostles are saying is not certain, then you can translate their words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “As we certainly believe that Jesus died and resurrected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1TH	4	14	j09o	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ γὰρ πιστεύομεν ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἀπέθανεν καὶ ἀνέστη	1	if we believe	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he actually means that it is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  what the apostles are saying is not certain, then you could translate their words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “As we certainly believe that Jesus died and resurrected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1TH	4	14	hmw4	figs-explicit	πιστεύομεν ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἀπέθανεν καὶ ἀνέστη	1	if we believe	Here it is assumed that the Thessalonian church knows the apostolic teaching that **Jesus died and rose again**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “we apostles trust―as you already know―that Jesus died and rose again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1TH	4	14	ybz6	figs-exclusive	πιστεύομεν	1	if we believe	Although **we believe** could be inclusive of the Thessalonian church (and by extension all Christians), it is most likely exclusive, referring to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy. The previous use in [4:11](../04/11.md) and subsequent uses (See “we say” in [4:15](../04/15.md)) are clearly referring to the apostles. Here, it mostly likely is a reference to their authoritative teaching. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1TH	4	14	kmk2	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὕτως…ὁ Θεὸς	1	rose again	This phrase could refer to: (1) result. Alternate translation: “then God” (2) manner. Alternate translation: “this is the way God” or “this is how God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])

en_tn_54-2TH.tsv

@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TH	1	3	o6v9	checking/headings		0	General Information:	In verses 3-12, Paul gives thanks for the believers in Thessalonica and prays for them. A heading for this section might be, “Thanks and Prayers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]])
 2TH	1	3	m6z5		εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν…πάντοτε	1	General Information:	Paul is expressing here that he has a moral obligation to God to give thanks for the believers in Thessalonica. Use a natural expression for this in your language. Alternate translation: “We are bound always to thank” or “We can do no other than to thank” or “We must give thanks continually to”
 2TH	1	3	ea59	figs-hyperbole	εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε	1	We ought always to give thanks to God	Paul uses **always** as a generalization meaning “often” or “regularly.” Alternate translation: “We should often give thanks to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-2TH	1	3	o01t	figs-explicit	εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε περὶ ὑμῶν, ἀδελφοί	1		If your readers might misunderstand his meaning and think that Paul is expressing an obligation only and that he does not actually pray for the Thessalonians, you could express the reality explicitly. Alternate translation: “We always thank God for you, brothers, as we ought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2TH	1	3	o01t	figs-explicit	εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε περὶ ὑμῶν, ἀδελφοί	1		If your readers might think that Paul is expressing an obligation only and that he does not actually pray for the Thessalonians, you could express the reality explicitly. Alternate translation: “We always thank God for you, brothers, as we ought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TH	1	3	h6t9	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. If your readers understand that it is addressed only to men, you may need to use both the masculine and the feminine forms of that word in your language. If you use a nonfigurative word such as “believers”, see that both the genders are addressed. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 2TH	1	3	ezaf	writing-pronouns	καθὼς ἄξιόν ἐστιν	1		If it is difficult to express **just as it is fitting** in your language or if it is unclear what **it** refers to, consider starting a new sentence here to state it clearly. Alternate translation: “When we give thanks for you we are doing the right thing” or “Giving thanks for you is right for us to be doing” or “…is the right thing to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2TH	1	3	emu9	figs-abstractnouns	ὑπεραυξάνει ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you can express this idea as a verb. Alternate translation: “you believe in Christ more and more” or “you increasingly trust in Christ” or “you rely on Christ more each day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TH	1	5	rs3b	figs-explicit	ἔνδειγμα τῆς δικαίας κρίσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰς τὸ καταξιωθῆναι ὑμᾶς	1		The **evidence** that Paul is referring to here is the faithful endurance of the Thessalonian believers while suffering persecution, which he mentioned in verse 4. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. It may also be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Your endurance while suffering is a clear indication of God’s righteous judgment, that he considers you worthy” or “Your faithfulness through persecution shows that God is just and right to consider you worthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TH	1	5	dad9	figs-activepassive	εἰς τὸ καταξιωθῆναι ὑμᾶς τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	for you to be considered worthy of the kingdom of God	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that God will consider you worthy to be part of his kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2TH	1	5	xm2g	figs-explicit	ὑπὲρ ἧς καὶ πάσχετε	1		Here, **also** could mean: (1) the Thessalonian believers are suffering for the kingdom of God as well as being counted worthy of it. Alternate translation: “being a part of which is also the reason that you are suffering” (2) the Thessalonian believers are suffering along with other believers. Alternate translation: “which is why you are going through sufferings along with many others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-2TH	1	6	cxx1	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴπερ δίκαιον παρὰ Θεῷ	1	if indeed it is righteous for God	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you know that God is just” or “for God is certainly right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+2TH	1	6	cxx1	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴπερ δίκαιον παρὰ Θεῷ	1	if indeed it is righteous for God	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you know that God is just” or “for God is certainly right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 2TH	1	6	id3i	figs-metaphor	παρὰ Θεῷ, ἀνταποδοῦναι τοῖς θλίβουσιν ὑμᾶς θλῖψιν	1	for God to return affliction to those who are afflicting you	Here, **to return** means to cause someone to experience the same thing that they did to someone else as though the same action were bouncing back onto the people who did that action. Use a natural expression for this kind of reciprocal action. Alternate translation: “for God to afflict those who are afflicting you” or “for God to pay back those who are afflicting you” “for God to do the same to those who are afflicting you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TH	1	6	zemk	figs-abstractnouns	ἀνταποδοῦναι τοῖς θλίβουσιν ὑμᾶς θλῖψιν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affliction**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to afflict those who are afflicting you” or “to trouble those who are troubling you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2TH	1	7	hxy2	figs-ellipsis	καὶ ὑμῖν…ἄνεσιν	1	and relief to you	The words **and relief to you** continue the description of what God is right “to return” to people (verse 6). If this would not be understood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and it is righteous for God to give relief to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TH	2	2	k4dk	figs-ellipsis	ὡς ὅτι	1	as if that	Paul is leaving out some words here that might be necessary in your language. If it is helpful, you could supply these words. Alternate translation: “that talks as if” or “that falsely claims that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 2TH	2	2	ib6m		ἡ ἡμέρα τοῦ Κυρίου	1	the day of the Lord	Here, **the day of the Lord** refers to the time when Jesus will come back to the earth for all believers.
 2TH	2	3	l9c5		μή τις ὑμᾶς ἐξαπατήσῃ κατὰ μηδένα τρόπον	1	General Information:	Alternate translation: “Do not permit anyone to fool you” or “Do not believe at all the wrong words that people are telling you about this”
-2TH	2	3	ej66	figs-ellipsis	ὅτι ἐὰν μὴ ἔλθῃ ἡ ἀποστασία πρῶτον	1	it may not come	Here, Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “for the day of the Lord will not come unless the apostacy comes first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+2TH	2	3	ej66	figs-ellipsis	ὅτι ἐὰν μὴ ἔλθῃ ἡ ἀποστασία πρῶτον	1	it may not come	Here, Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “for the day of the Lord will not come unless the apostacy comes first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 2TH	2	3	y7ch	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀποστασία	1	the apostacy	Here, **the apostacy** refers to a future time when many people will turn away from God. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express it in another way. Alternate translation: “the time when many people will rebel against God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2TH	2	3	e86v	figs-activepassive	ἀποκαλυφθῇ ὁ ἄνθρωπος τῆς ἀνομίας	1	the man of lawlessness may be revealed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the man of lawlessness arrives” or “the man of lawlessness makes himself known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2TH	2	3	jsyj	figs-possession	ὁ ἄνθρωπος τῆς ἀνομίας	1		Paul is using the possessive form to describe a man who is characterized by lawlessness. By this Paul means that this man will oppose all of God’s commandments and instructions. If this is not clear in your language, you could express this another way. Alternate translation: “the lawless man” or “the man who opposes God’s rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -149,12 +149,12 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TH	3	1	v8k2	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1		The pronoun **us** refers to Paul and his companions. If you have exclusive and inclusive first person pronouns in your language, this should be an exclusive pronoun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 2TH	3	1	r54v	figs-metaphor	τρέχῃ	1	so that the word of the Lord might run and might be glorified, just as also with you	Paul speaks of God’s **word** spreading as if it were running from place to place. He is comparing the rapid spread of God’s word to a person who takes good news to others. Alternate translation: “might spread rapidly” or “might be heard by many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TH	3	1	yvkm	figs-activepassive	καὶ δοξάζηται	1	so that the word of the Lord might run and might be glorified, just as also with you	You can state this in active form, if the passive construction is not natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and that many people would honor it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-2TH	3	1	egho	figs-ellipsis	καθὼς καὶ πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1		This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “just as also happened with you” or “which is exactly what you did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+2TH	3	1	egho	figs-ellipsis	καθὼς καὶ πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1		This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “just as also happened with you” or “which is exactly what you did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 2TH	3	2	xg2h	figs-activepassive	ῥυσθῶμεν	1	we might be rescued	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God may save us” or “God may rescue us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2TH	3	2	h11p	figs-doublet	ἀτόπων καὶ πονηρῶν	1		These two terms mean basically the same thing and are used together to emphasize the amount of evil. If your language does not use repetition to do this or if you do not have two words for these attributes, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “very wicked men” or “many wicked men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 2TH	3	2	p1ct	figs-litotes	οὐ γὰρ πάντων ἡ πίστις	1	for not everyone has faith	The phrase **not everyone** is a negative understatement that emphasizes how rare faith is. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “for only some people believe in the Lord” or “for people who believe in Jesus are few” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 2TH	3	2	appf	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ πίστις	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “believes in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-2TH	3	3	yx9g	figs-explicit	ὃς στηρίξει	1	who will strengthen	The word **strengthen** here refers to spiritual strength, not physical strength. If your readers might misunderstand this, it can be made clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “who will strengthen you spiritually” or “who will make you inwardly strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2TH	3	3	yx9g	figs-explicit	ὃς στηρίξει	1	who will strengthen	The word **strengthen** here refers to spiritual strength, not physical strength. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “who will strengthen you spiritually” or “who will make you inwardly strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TH	3	3	p91k		τοῦ πονηροῦ	1	the evil one	This could mean: (1) the evil being Satan. Alternate translation: “Satan” or (2) evil in general. Alternate translation: “evil”
 2TH	3	4	xk85	figs-nominaladj	πεποίθαμεν δὲ	1	we are confident	The phrase **We are also confident** may be confusing in some languages. If that is the case in your language, you could translate this as a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “We also have faith” or “We also trust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
 2TH	3	4	w79e	figs-metaphor	πεποίθαμεν δὲ ἐν Κυρίῳ ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς	1		This could mean: (1) Paul has confidence in the Thessalonian believers because of the close relationship that they have with the Lord Jesus. In this case, Paul is speaking of this relationship as if they were inside the Lord Jesus. Alternative translation: “Because you are united to the Lord, we are also confident” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) (2) Paul has confidence in the Lord Jesus, that he will cause them to do what is right. Alternative translation: “Because we trust in the Lord Jesus to enable you, we are also confident”

en_tn_58-PHM.tsv

@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ PHM	1	16	bynb		ὑπὲρ δοῦλον	1		Alternate translation: “more valuab
 PHM	1	16	f8tz	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφὸν	1	a beloved brother	Here, **brother** is a metaphor for a fellow believer. Alternative translation, “spiritual brother” or “brother in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 PHM	1	16	qxi0		ἀγαπητόν	1		Alternate translation: “dear” or “precious”
 PHM	1	16	scj1		ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	in the Lord	Alternate translation: “in the fellowship of brotherhood through Jesus” or “in the fellowship of believers in the Lord”
-PHM	1	17	e1j2	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ…με ἔχεις κοινωνόν	1	if you have me as a partner	Paul is writing in a way that makes it seem as though it is possible that Philemon does not consider that Paul is his partner, but he knows that Philemon does consider Paul to be his partner. This is a way of getting Philemon to agree on one thing (that Paul is a partner) so that he will agree to the other thing (to receive Onesimus). If your language does not state something as uncertain if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you have me as a partner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+PHM	1	17	e1j2	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ…με ἔχεις κοινωνόν	1	if you have me as a partner	Paul is writing in a way that makes it seem as though it is possible that Philemon does not consider that Paul is his partner, but he knows that Philemon does consider Paul to be his partner. This is a way of getting Philemon to agree on one thing (that Paul is a partner) so that he will agree to the other thing (to receive Onesimus). If your language does not state something as uncertain if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you have me as a partner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 PHM	1	17	e0es	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1		**Therefore** means that what came before this word is the reason for what comes after it. It may be that Paul intends for everything that came before to be the reason, because this word also indicates that Paul is now coming to the main point of the letter. Use a natural method in your language to indicate this transition. Alternate translation: “Because of all of these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 PHM	1	17	d56r	figs-ellipsis	προσλαβοῦ αὐτὸν ὡς ἐμέ.	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words here that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “receive him just as you would receive me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 PHM	1	18	nq4j	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ δέ τι ἠδίκησέν σε ἢ ὀφείλει	1		Onesimus certainly did wrong to Philemon by running away, and he probably also stole some of Philemon’s property. But Paul is stating these things as uncertain in order to be polite. If your language does not use a conditional statement in this way, then use a more natural way to state this. Alternate translation: “But whatever he has taken or whatever wrong he has done to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])

en_tn_61-1PE.tsv

@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	1	5	xsp2	figs-explicit	ἐν καιρῷ ἐσχάτῳ	1		Here, **the last time** refers to “the day of the Lord,” which is the time when Jesus returns to the world to judge everyone and vindicate those who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]]) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the last time, when Jesus returns and judges everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	1	6	p1ta	writing-pronouns	ἐν ᾧ	1		Here, **this** could refer to: (1) the “last time” referred to at the end of the previous verse. Alternate translation: “About this last time” (2) everything described in [verses 3–5](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “In all of this that I have said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1PE	1	6	hy8d	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐν ᾧ ἀγαλλιᾶσθε	1	In this you greatly rejoice	**In** here introduces the reason why Peter’s readers rejoice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “On account of this you greatly rejoice” or “Because of this you greatly rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1PE	1	6	dtvb	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἄρτι, εἰ δέον λυπηθέντες	1		Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “if now it is necessary, and it is, to have been distressed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1PE	1	6	dtvb	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἄρτι, εἰ δέον λυπηθέντες	1		Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “if now it is necessary, and it is, to have been distressed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1PE	1	6	a2bq	figs-activepassive	ὀλίγον ἄρτι, εἰ δέον λυπηθέντες ἐν ποικίλοις πειρασμοῖς	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if now it is necessary for various trials to distress you a little while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1PE	1	7	vvp1	figs-metaphor	τὸ δοκίμιον ὑμῶν τῆς πίστεως…διὰ πυρὸς δὲ δοκιμαζομένου	1	so that the proof of your faith	Here Peter speaks of **faith**, as if it were gold that is refined by passing it through **fire**. He also uses **fire** to refer to the hardships that test how well believers trust in Christ. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “the genuineness of your faith … but being tested by hardships the way fire tests gold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	1	7	ct3n	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ δοκίμιον ὑμῶν τῆς πίστεως	1	the proof of your faith	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **genuineness** and **faith**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the fact that you genuinely believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	1	16	e6el	writing-quotations	γέγραπται	1		Here Peter uses **it is written** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Leviticus 11:44](../lev/11/44.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Peter is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it had been written in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 1PE	1	16	tt52	figs-declarative	ἅγιοι ἔσεσθε	1		Peter quotes God using a future statement to give a command. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for a command. Alternate translation: “You must be holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 1PE	1	16	s8kz	figs-123person	ὅτι ἐγὼ ἅγιος	1	You will be holy, because I am holy	In this quotation from the Old Testament, **I** refers to God. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because I, God, am holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-1PE	1	17	x0xl	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ…ἐπικαλεῖσθε	1		Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because you call” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1PE	1	17	x0xl	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ…ἐπικαλεῖσθε	1		Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because you call” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1PE	1	17	c53b	figs-explicit	τὸν ἀπροσωπολήμπτως κρίνοντα	1		This phrase refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, who judges impartially” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	1	17	s6gv	figs-metaphor	τὸν τῆς παροικίας ὑμῶν χρόνον	1	conduct yourselves in fear during the time of your journey	Here Peter speaks of his readers as if they were people living in a foreign land far away from their homes. Like people living away from home, so are Christians living away from their home in heaven. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “during the time that you are living away from your true home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	1	18	pcm5	figs-infostructure	οὐ φθαρτοῖς, ἀργυρίῳ ἢ χρυσίῳ, ἐλυτρώθητε ἐκ τῆς ματαίας ὑμῶν ἀναστροφῆς πατροπαραδότου	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “you have been redeemed from your futile behavior handed down from your fathers, not with perishable things, with silver or with gold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	1	22	e9wr	figs-metonymy	ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας, ἀλλήλους ἀγαπήσατε ἐκτενῶς	1	love one another earnestly from a pure heart	Peter uses **heart** here to refer to a person’s thoughts or emotions. The word **from** indicates that the **heart** must be the source of the **love** that Peter is telling his readers to have. Therefore, this phrase has a similar meaning to the word “sincere” in the previous clause. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “love one another earnestly based on sincere thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	1	23	k79f	figs-metaphor	ἀναγεγεννημένοι	1		See how you translated **born again** in [verse 3](../01/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	1	23	w4v3	figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἐκ σπορᾶς φθαρτῆς	1	having been born again, not from perishable seed, but from imperishable	The word **seed** usually refers to either the seed of a plant or the sperm cell of a man, which is used to produce a baby. However, here Peter uses **seed** as a metaphor. It could refer to: (1) the **word of God** mentioned later in the verse. In this case, Peter is saying what the **word of God** is not. Alternate translation: “not by means of a human message that can perish” (2) physical human birth, in which case the meaning is similar to the idea expressed in [John 1:13](../jhn/01/13.md). Alternate translation: “not by means of mortal physical birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1PE	1	23	nh9r	figs-ellipsis	ἀφθάρτου	1	from imperishable	Peter is leaving out a word that a phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “from imperishable seed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1PE	1	23	nh9r	figs-ellipsis	ἀφθάρτου	1	from imperishable	Peter is leaving out a word that a phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “from imperishable seed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1PE	1	23	tjq9	figs-metonymy	λόγου ζῶντος Θεοῦ, καὶ μένοντος	1	through the living and enduring word of God	Here Peter uses **word** to describe the gospel message that came from God and was proclaimed to Peter’s readers by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s living and enduring message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	1	23	pkpl	figs-doublet	ζῶντος…καὶ μένοντος	1		Here, **living** and **enduring** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that God’s word is permanent. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “perpetually enduring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1PE	1	24	kyc5	writing-quotations	διότι	1		**For** here introduces a quotation of some phrases from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 40:6–8](../isa/40/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Peter is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “It is as Isaiah wrote in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
@@ -140,13 +140,13 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	2	1	inct	figs-declarative	ἀποθέμενοι…πᾶσαν κακίαν, καὶ πάντα δόλον, καὶ ὑποκρίσεις, καὶ φθόνους, καὶ πάσας καταλαλιάς	1		This clause indicates a command in addition to the command to “long for pure spiritual milk” that occurs next in the verse. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for a command. Alternate translation: “put aside all evil and all deceit and hypocrisies and envies and all slanders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
 1PE	2	1	g65y	figs-metaphor	ἀποθέμενοι…πᾶσαν κακίαν, καὶ πάντα δόλον, καὶ ὑποκρίσεις, καὶ φθόνους, καὶ πάσας καταλαλιάς	1	having put aside all evil, and all deceit and hypocrisy and envy, and all slander	Peter speaks of these sinful actions as if they were objects that people could **put aside** the way people remove dirty clothing. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having stopped being evil or being deceptive or being hypocritical or being envious or speaking slander” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	2	1	r853	figs-abstractnouns	ἀποθέμενοι…πᾶσαν κακίαν, καὶ πάντα δόλον, καὶ ὑποκρίσεις, καὶ φθόνους, καὶ πάσας καταλαλιάς	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **evil**, **deceit**, **hypocrisies**, **envies**, or **slanders**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “having put aside every kind of evil and all deceitful, hypocritical, deceptive, and slanderous acts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1PE	2	2	y6fv	figs-simile	ὡς ἀρτιγέννητα βρέφη τὸ λογικὸν ἄδολον γάλα ἐπιποθήσατε	1	As newborn infants, long for pure spiritual milk	The point of this comparison is that Peter wanted his readers to desire knowledge of God’s word just as **newborn babies** desire milk. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Just as babies long for their mother’s milk, so you must long for the pure rational milk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+1PE	2	2	y6fv	figs-simile	ὡς ἀρτιγέννητα βρέφη τὸ λογικὸν ἄδολον γάλα ἐπιποθήσατε	1	As newborn infants, long for pure spiritual milk	The point of this comparison is that Peter wanted his readers to desire knowledge of God’s word just as **newborn babies** desire milk. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Just as babies long for their mother’s milk, so you must long for the pure rational milk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 1PE	2	2	rm71		ἐπιποθήσατε	1	long for	Alternate translation: “desire intensely” or “yearn for”
 1PE	2	2	fn81	figs-metaphor	τὸ λογικὸν ἄδολον γάλα	1	pure spiritual milk	The word translated as **rational** could also be translated “pertaining to the word”; it refers to the word of God. Peter speaks of the word of God as if it were **rational milk** that nourishes children. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s pure word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	2	2	ypy6	figs-metaphor	αὐξηθῆτε	1	you may grow up	Peter speaks of believers advancing in the knowledge of God and faithfulness to him as if they were children growing up. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you may mature in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	2	2	vg76	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς σωτηρίαν	1	to salvation	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “until you are saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	2	2	wmw2	figs-explicit	εἰς σωτηρίαν	1		Here, **salvation** refers to when Jesus returns and God completes the **salvation** of his people. Peter also uses this meaning for **salvation** in [1:5](../01/05.md). See how you translated **salvation** there. Alternate translation: “until God saves you completely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1PE	2	3	uja9	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ἐγεύσασθε	1		Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you have tasted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1PE	2	3	uja9	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ἐγεύσασθε	1		Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you have tasted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1PE	2	3	tui9	figs-metaphor	εἰ ἐγεύσασθε	1	if you have tasted that the Lord is kind	Peter uses **tasted** to refer to personally experiencing something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “if you have experienced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	2	3	hruw	figs-quotemarks	ἐγεύσασθε ὅτι χρηστὸς ὁ Κύριος	1		This clause is a paraphrase of [Psalm 34:8](../psa/34/08.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 1PE	2	4	n5pm	figs-explicit	πρὸς ὃν προσερχόμενοι	1		Here, **coming** could indicate: (1) a factual statement, as in the UST. (2) a command, in which case “being built up” in the next verse would also be a command. Alternate translation: “Come to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	2	6	lrxm	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μὴ	1		The phrase **certainly not** translates two negative words in Greek. God uses them together to emphasize the truth of this statement. If your language can use two negatives together for emphasis without them cancelling each other to create a positive meaning, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 1PE	2	7	ze1c	figs-explicit	ἡ τιμὴ	1		Here, **this honor** refers to the statement in the previous verse that people who believe in Jesus will “certainly not be ashamed.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this honor of never being ashamed is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	2	7	rdhk	figs-explicit	ἡ τιμὴ	1		The phrase translated **this honor** could also be translated as “precious,” in which case it would refer to the “cornerstone” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “he is precious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1PE	2	7	sj13	figs-ellipsis	ἀπιστοῦσιν δὲ	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “But to those who do not believe, God says in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1PE	2	7	sj13	figs-ellipsis	ἀπιστοῦσιν δὲ	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “But to those who do not believe, God says in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1PE	2	7	hext	figs-quotemarks	λίθος ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες, οὗτος ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας	1		This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 118:22](../psa/118/22.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 1PE	2	7	uu3j	figs-metaphor	λίθος ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες	1	The stone that was rejected by … has become the head of the corner	The author uses **stone** to refer to the Messiah, and he uses **builders** to refer to those who **rejected** Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “The Messiah who was rejected just like builders reject a stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	2	7	ql12	figs-metaphor	κεφαλὴν γωνίας	1	the head of the corner	This phrase has the same meaning as “cornerstone” in the previous verse. It refers to the most important stone in a building. Here it refers specifically to the Messiah. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Messiah, who is like a cornerstone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	2	14	bxm9	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ἐκδίκησιν κακοποιῶν, ἔπαινον δὲ ἀγαθοποιῶν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **punishment** and **praise**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “to punish evildoers and praise those who do good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	2	15	mh6s	figs-infostructure	ἀγαθοποιοῦντας φιμοῦν τὴν τῶν ἀφρόνων ἀνθρώπων ἀγνωσίαν	1	doing good to silence the ignorant talk of foolish people	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “to silence the ignorance of foolish people by doing good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 1PE	2	15	nzwv	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγαθοποιοῦντας φιμοῦν τὴν τῶν ἀφρόνων ἀνθρώπων ἀγνωσίαν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **ignorance**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “doing good to silence the ignorant things that foolish people are saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1PE	2	16	zqe3	figs-ellipsis	ὡς ἐλεύθεροι	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. These words could be: (1) the command to submit to authorities stated in [verse 13](../02/13.md). Alternate translation: “submit as free people” (2) an implied imperative verb. Alternate translation: “act as free people” or “live as free people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1PE	2	16	zqe3	figs-ellipsis	ὡς ἐλεύθεροι	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. These words could be: (1) the command to submit to authorities stated in [verse 13](../02/13.md). Alternate translation: “submit as free people” (2) an implied imperative verb. Alternate translation: “act as free people” or “live as free people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1PE	2	16	y9pg	figs-metaphor	ὡς ἐπικάλυμμα…τῆς κακίας	1	as a covering for wickedness	Here, **covering** could refer to: (1) something to prevent people from knowing about one’s evil deeds. Alternate translation: “as a way to prevent others from seeing your evil” (2) an excuse or pretext to do evil deeds. Alternate translation: “as an excuse to do evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	2	17	gwy8	figs-metaphor	τὴν ἀδελφότητα	1	the brotherhood	Here, **brotherhood** refers to all Christian believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the community of believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	2	18	w2nc			0	General Information:	Peter begins to speak specifically to people who were slaves who worked in people’s houses.
@@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	3	1	wp5p	figs-metonymy	τινες ἀπειθοῦσιν τῷ λόγῳ	1	some are disobedient to the word	Here, **being disobedient to the word** could refer to: (1) refusing to believe the gospel message, as in [2:8](../02/08.md). Alternate translation: “some do not believe the message about Jesus” (2) disobeying the commands God gave in his word. Alternate translation: “some do not obey what God commands in his word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	3	1	kbis	figs-activepassive	κερδηθήσονται	1	they will be won	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you will win them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1PE	3	1	bs56	figs-idiom	κερδηθήσονται	1	they will be won	Here, **won** is an idiom that means that the unbelieving husbands will become believers in Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they will be persuaded to believe in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1PE	3	1	qp4q	figs-ellipsis	ἄνευ λόγου	1	without a word	Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “without you saying a word.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1PE	3	1	qp4q	figs-ellipsis	ἄνευ λόγου	1	without a word	Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “without you saying a word.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1PE	3	1	b56u	figs-metonymy	ἄνευ λόγου	1		Here, **word** refers to anything the wives might say to their husbands about the gospel message. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “without a word about the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	3	2	rzrl	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐποπτεύσαντες	1		This phrase indicates the reason why the unbelieving husbands would become believers in Jesus. These husbands became believers because they **observed** how their wives behaved. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because they observed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1PE	3	2	zft4	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἐν φόβῳ ἁγνὴν ἀναστροφὴν ὑμῶν	1	having seen your pure behavior with respect	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **behavior**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “you behave purely and with fear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	3	8	f5y7		ὁμόφρονες	1	be likeminded	Alternate translation: “have the same opinion and be” or “have the same attitude and be”
 1PE	3	8	tzgc	figs-gendernotations	φιλάδελφοι	1		Although **brothers** is masculine, Peter is using the phrase **loving as brothers** in a generic sense to refer to the kind of love that all believers should have for other believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “loving as fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1PE	3	9	z5u3	figs-metaphor	μὴ ἀποδιδόντες κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ, ἢ λοιδορίαν ἀντὶ λοιδορίας	1	Do not pay back evil in exchange for evil or insult in exchange for insult	Peter uses **paying back** to refer to responding to the actions of another person as if one was returning money to that person for those actions. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not doing evil to someone who does evil to you or insulting someone who insults you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1PE	3	9	t6il	figs-ellipsis	εὐλογοῦντες	1	blessing	Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “blessing those who do evil to you or insult you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1PE	3	9	t6il	figs-ellipsis	εὐλογοῦντες	1	blessing	Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “blessing those who do evil to you or insult you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1PE	3	9	w5df	figs-activepassive	εἰς τοῦτο ἐκλήθητε	1	to this you were called	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God called you to this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1PE	3	9	wx2r	figs-explicit	εἰς τοῦτο ἐκλήθητε, ἵνα	1		Here, **this** could refer to: (1) **blessing** earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “you were called to bless so that” (2) **inherit a blessing** later in the verse “to this you were called so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	3	9	n3xc	figs-metaphor	ἵνα εὐλογίαν κληρονομήσητε	1	so that you might inherit a blessing	Peter speaks of experiencing God’s **blessing** as if one is receiving an inheritance. If this might confuse your readers, you could express it plainly. Alternate translation: “so that you might experience God’s blessing as your permanent possession” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -338,10 +338,10 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	3	18	h6v4	figs-activepassive	ζῳοποιηθεὶς…πνεύματι	1	having been made alive in the spirit	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God’s spirit having made him alive” or “God having made him alive in the spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1PE	3	18	n7nh	figs-explicit	ζῳοποιηθεὶς…πνεύματι	1	in the spirit	Here, **the spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, in which case this phrase would indicate the means by which Jesus was made alive. Alternate translation: “having been made him alive by the Spirit” (2) Jesus’ spiritual existence, in which case this phrase would be referring to the spiritual realm that is in contrast to the physical realm referred to with the phrase “in the flesh.” Alternate translation: “having been made alive spiritually” or “having been made alive in the spiritual realm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	3	19	hp82	figs-explicit	ἐν ᾧ	1	in which	Here, **which** refers to “the spirit” in the previous verse. As in the previous verse, this could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “by means of the Spirit” (2) Jesus’ spiritual existence. Alternate translation: “in the spiritual realm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1PE	3	19	ewuu	figs-ellipsis	ἐκήρυξεν	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. This phrase could mean: (1) Jesus proclaimed God’s victory over sin and death, which he accomplished through his death and resurrection. Alternate translation: “he proclaimed God’s victory” (2) Jesus preached the gospel to wicked people indirectly through the preaching of Noah during the time before the great flood. This interpretation is less likely to be correct, because it would mean that Noah was actually the one preaching and Peter does not mention Noah preaching or Jesus’ pre-incarnate existence anywhere in this letter. Alternate translation: “he preached the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1PE	3	19	ewuu	figs-ellipsis	ἐκήρυξεν	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. This phrase could mean: (1) Jesus proclaimed God’s victory over sin and death, which he accomplished through his death and resurrection. Alternate translation: “he proclaimed God’s victory” (2) Jesus preached the gospel to wicked people indirectly through the preaching of Noah during the time before the great flood. This interpretation is less likely to be correct, because it would mean that Noah was actually the one preaching and Peter does not mention Noah preaching or Jesus’ pre-incarnate existence anywhere in this letter. Alternate translation: “he preached the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1PE	3	19	ez3d	figs-explicit	τοῖς ἐν φυλακῇ πνεύμασιν	1	to the spirits in prison	Here, **spirits** could refer to: (1) evil spirits whom God imprisoned because of what they did before the flood that occurred in Noah’s time (see [2 Peter 2:4–5](../2pe/02/04.md); [Jude 6–7](../jud/01/06.md); [Genesis 6:1–4](../gen/06/01.md)), as in the UST. (2) the spirits of people who died during the flood that occurred in Noah’s time. This interpretation is a less likely to be correct because Peter never refers to people as **spirits**, but rather “souls,” as in the next verse. Alternate translation: “to those people who had died and were in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	3	19	zpyr	figs-metaphor	ἐν φυλακῇ	1		Here Peter uses **prison** as a metaphor. It could refer to: (1) a place where God imprisoned certain evil spirits whom he will judge when he judges the whole world (see [2 Peter 2:4–5](../2pe/02/04.md); [Jude 6–7](../jud/01/06.md)). Alternate translation: “whom God had imprisoned to await judgment” (2) the place where sinful people go when they die. Alternate translation: “in hell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1PE	3	20	qxah	figs-ellipsis	ἀπειθήσασίν	1	when the patience of God was waiting	Peter is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “having disobeyed God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1PE	3	20	qxah	figs-ellipsis	ἀπειθήσασίν	1	when the patience of God was waiting	Peter is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “having disobeyed God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1PE	3	20	s7qm	figs-metonymy	ἡ τοῦ Θεοῦ μακροθυμία	1	the patience of God	Peter uses **patience of God** to refer to God himself. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “God himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	3	20	yyth	figs-metonymy	ἐν ἡμέραις Νῶε	1		Here Peter uses **days of Noah** to refer to the time period when Noah was alive. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in the time of Noah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	3	20	c6mi	figs-activepassive	κατασκευαζομένης κιβωτοῦ	1	in the days of Noah, while an ark was being constructed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when Noah was constructing an ark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -398,8 +398,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	4	10	xvj3	figs-explicit	ἕκαστος καθὼς ἔλαβεν χάρισμα	1	Just as each one has received a gift	Here, **gift** refers to special spiritual abilities that God gives to believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “just as each one has received a special spiritual ability from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	4	10	a30t	figs-metaphor	ὡς καλοὶ οἰκονόμοι ποικίλης χάριτος Θεοῦ	1		Peter uses **stewards** to refer to Christians using spiritual abilities from God to serve other believers as if they were managing resources for a boss. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “as those managing well the diverse grace of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	4	10	smyw	figs-possession	ποικίλης χάριτος Θεοῦ	1		Peter is using the possessive form to describe **grace** that is given by God. The word **grace** refers to the various spiritual gifts that God graciously gives believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the diverse, gracious gifts from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-1PE	4	11	b81x	figs-ellipsis	εἴ τις λαλεῖ, ὡς λόγια Θεοῦ	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “if anyone speaks, let him speak as if he is speaking the words of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1PE	4	11	b81x	figs-ellipsis	εἴ τις λαλεῖ, ὡς λόγια Θεοῦ	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “if anyone speaks, let him speak as if he is speaking the words of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-1PE	4	11	vs2d	figs-ellipsis	εἴ τις διακονεῖ, ὡς ἐξ ἰσχύος ἧς χορηγεῖ ὁ Θεός	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “if anyone serves others, let him serve others as if he were serving them with the strength that God supplies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1PE	4	11	vs2d	figs-ellipsis	εἴ τις διακονεῖ, ὡς ἐξ ἰσχύος ἧς χορηγεῖ ὁ Θεός	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “if anyone serves others, let him serve others as if he were serving them with the strength that God supplies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1PE	4	11	ir6x	figs-activepassive	δοξάζηται ὁ Θεὸς	1	so that in all God may be glorified	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you might glorify God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1PE	4	11	wq9e	figs-abstractnouns	ᾧ ἐστιν ἡ δόξα καὶ τὸ κράτος	1	may be glorified	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **glory** and **power**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “may he be recognized as glorious and powerful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	4	12	vw9s	figs-metaphor	τῇ ἐν ὑμῖν πυρώσει	1	the fiery trial among you that is happening for a testing to you	Peter refers to suffering Christians as if they were gold being refined by being passed through a fire. In the same way that fire refines gold, trials test and strengthen a Christian’s faith. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “the trial you are experiencing that is refining you like gold is refined in fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -417,7 +417,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	4	16	xm8z	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ	1	in this name	Here, **this name** refers to the title “Christian” mentioned earlier in the verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he bears the name ‘Christian’” or “because people have recognized him as a Christian” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	4	17	nawr	figs-abstractnouns	ὁ καιρὸς τοῦ ἄρξασθαι τὸ κρίμα ἀπὸ τοῦ οἴκου τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “it is time for God to begin judging the household of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	4	17	x9np	figs-metaphor	τοῦ οἴκου τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the household of God	Here Peter uses **household** to refer to all believers as if they were a family that belongs to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “those who belong to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1PE	4	17	v74q	figs-ellipsis	εἰ δὲ πρῶτον ἀφ’ ἡμῶν	1	the household of God	Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but if it is time for judgment to begin first with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1PE	4	17	v74q	figs-ellipsis	εἰ δὲ πρῶτον ἀφ’ ἡμῶν	1	the household of God	Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but if it is time for judgment to begin first with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1PE	4	17	phx3	figs-exclusive	ἀφ’ ἡμῶν	1	the household of God	When Peter says **us**, he is speaking of himself and his readers, so **us** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1PE	4	17	c8ke	figs-rquestion	τί τὸ τέλος τῶν ἀπειθούντων τῷ τοῦ Θεοῦ εὐαγγελίῳ?	1	but if first with us, what will be the end of those disobeying the gospel of God?	Peter is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize that God’s judgment will be more severe for people who reject the gospel than for those who believe it. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “how terrible will be the end of the ones disobeying the gospel of God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1PE	4	17	e5fn	figs-explicit	τὸ τέλος	1	but if first with us, what will be the end of those disobeying the gospel of God?	Here, **end** refers to the final result of the lives of people who do not believe in Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the final result” or “the outcome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -441,7 +441,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	5	1	yb3l	figs-explicit	τῆς μελλούσης ἀποκαλύπτεσθαι δόξης	1	of the glory that is about to be revealed	The phrase **the glory that is about to be revealed** refers to Christ’s glorious return to earth in the future. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in the glory that is about to be revealed when Christ returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	5	2	f63v	figs-metaphor	ποιμάνατε τὸ…ποίμνιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Shepherd the flock of God	Here Peter uses **Shepherd** to refer to leading and taking care of believers, and he uses **flock** to refer to those believers. Elders who lead assemblies of believers should take care of those believers like shepherds take care of their sheep. Since the shepherd and sheep metaphors are important metaphors in the Bible, you should keep the metaphors in your translation or use similes. Alternate translation: “Take care of God’s people as if they were a flock of sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	5	2	dvai	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπισκοποῦντες μὴ ἀναγκαστῶς	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **oversight** and **compulsion**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “supervising—not because you must do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1PE	5	2	zfei	figs-ellipsis	ἐπισκοποῦντες μὴ ἀναγκαστῶς	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “exercising oversight over them—not doing this under compulsion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1PE	5	2	zfei	figs-ellipsis	ἐπισκοποῦντες μὴ ἀναγκαστῶς	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “exercising oversight over them—not doing this under compulsion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1PE	5	2	k4dk	figs-doublet	μὴ ἀναγκαστῶς, ἀλλὰ ἑκουσίως	1		The phrases **not under compulsion** and **willingly** mean the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Peter wants church leaders to voluntarily take care of believers. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “with complete willingness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1PE	5	2	cp7u	figs-explicit	κατὰ Θεόν	1		This phrase refers to acting according to God’s will or requirements. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to God’s will” or “as God wants you to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1PE	5	2	c6qf	figs-doublet	μηδὲ αἰσχροκερδῶς, ἀλλὰ προθύμως	1		The phrases **not greedily** and **eagerly** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Peter wants church leaders to eagerly take care of believers. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “with complete eagerness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -470,7 +470,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	5	8	wbb5	figs-doublet	νήψατε, γρηγορήσατε	1	Be sober	The words translated as **sober** and **watchful** mean basically the same thing. Peter uses them to emphasize that believers need to be alert since the devil wants to destroy them. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Be completely alert” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1PE	5	8	k9nt	figs-metaphor	νήψατε	1	Be sober	See how you translated **sober** in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	5	8	tl7i	figs-simile	ὡς λέων ὠρυόμενος περιπατεῖ, ζητῶν τινα καταπιεῖν	1	the devil, is walking around like a roaring lion, seeking someone to devour	Peter speaks of **the devil** as if he were a **roaring lion** who wants to **devour** people. Just as a hungry lion devours its prey, the devil is **seeking** to destroy the faith of believers. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is trying to find ways to destroy the faith of believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-1PE	5	9	v4t5	figs-ellipsis	στερεοὶ τῇ πίστει	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “being firm in the faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1PE	5	9	v4t5	figs-ellipsis	στερεοὶ τῇ πίστει	1		Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “being firm in the faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1PE	5	9	vwtc	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ πίστει	1		Here, **the faith** could refer to: (1) a person’s trust in Jesus. Alternate translation: “in the faith that you have” (2) the Christian faith in general. Alternate translation: “in the Christian faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	5	9	tusy	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ αὐτὰ τῶν παθημάτων…ἐπιτελεῖσθαι	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sufferings**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that people are suffering in the same ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1PE	5	9	uk06	figs-activepassive	τὰ αὐτὰ τῶν παθημάτων…ἐπιτελεῖσθαι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the same kind of sufferings are occurring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

en_tn_62-2PE.tsv

@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	2	3	jvh9	figs-personification	τὸ κρίμα ἔκπαλαι οὐκ ἀργεῖ, καὶ ἡ ἀπώλεια αὐτῶν οὐ νυστάζει	1		Peter speaks of **condemnation** and **destruction** as if they are people who can be **idle** or **sleep**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “condemnation from long ago is not ineffective, and their destruction is not delayed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 2PE	2	3	c57u	figs-abstractnouns	οἷς τὸ κρίμα ἔκπαλαι οὐκ ἀργεῖ, καὶ ἡ ἀπώλεια αὐτῶν οὐ νυστάζει	1	their condemnation has not been idle, and their destruction is not asleep	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns “condemnation” and “destruction” by stating the ideas behind them with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “they are not idly condemned from long ago, and they will not be destroyed too late” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	2	4	k2g4	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		**For** indicates here that Peter is giving the reason for the result he implicitly described in the previous verse. He is saying why the destruction of the false teachers is certain. Alternate translation: “This is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-2PE	2	4	s115	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, **if** indicates the beginning of a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since God did not spare the angels who had sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+2PE	2	4	s115	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, **if** indicates the beginning of a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since God did not spare the angels who had sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 2PE	2	4	pr13		οὐκ ἐφείσατο	1	did not spare	Here, **spare** means “to refrain from punishing.” Alternate translation: “did not refrain from punishing”
 2PE	2	4	dzi2	figs-distinguish	ἀγγέλων ἁμαρτησάντων	1		Peter uses **who had sinned** to distinguish the angels who were punished by God from those that were not. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 2PE	2	4	xwxn	translate-textvariants	σειροῖς ζόφου	1		Some of the best ancient manuscripts read “pits” instead of “chains.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading in the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
@@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	2	4	plhp	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς κρίσιν	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **judgment** by translating it with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “to be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	2	4	e0ue	figs-explicit	εἰς κρίσιν τηρουμένους	1		This phrase refers to the sinful angels mentioned earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those sinful angels who are being kept for judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2PE	2	4	ppvc	figs-activepassive	εἰς κρίσιν τηρουμένους	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active verbal form and you can indicate who is doing the action. Alternate translation: “those whom God is keeping for judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-2PE	2	5	zx4k	grammar-connect-condition-fact	καὶ	1		Here, **and** indicates the beginning of the second condition in a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+2PE	2	5	zx4k	grammar-connect-condition-fact	καὶ	1		Here, **and** indicates the beginning of the second condition in a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 2PE	2	5	hpv7	figs-metonymy	ἀρχαίου κόσμου οὐκ ἐφείσατο	1	he did not spare the ancient world	Here, **world** refers to the people who lived in it. Alternate translation: “he did not spare the people who lived in the ancient times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2PE	2	5	f000		οὐκ ἐφείσατο	1		As in [2:4](../02/04.md), the word **spare** here means “to refrain from punishing.” Alternate translation: “did not refrain from punishing”
 2PE	2	5	t2w9	writing-pronouns	οὐκ ἐφείσατο	1		Here, **he** refers to God. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God did not spare” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	2	5	xy9u	figs-possession	δικαιοσύνης κήρυκα	1		Peter could be using the possessive form to refer to: (1) a preacher who is characterized by righteousness. Alternate translation: “a preacher who is righteous” (2) a preacher who tells others to live righteously. Alternate translation: “one who urged others to live righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 2PE	2	5	enbs		κατακλυσμὸν κόσμῳ ἀσεβῶν ἐπάξας	1		This clause indicates when God protected Noah and his other seven family members, when he brought a flood upon the world, as it is translated in the UST.
 2PE	2	5	z814	figs-possession	κόσμῳ ἀσεβῶν	1		Peter could be using the possessive form to refer to: (1) the human content of the ancient world. Alternate translation: “the world that contained ungodly people” (2) the world as being characterized by ungodliness. Alternate translation: “the ungodly world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-2PE	2	6	xhcb	grammar-connect-condition-fact	καὶ	1		Here, **and** indicates the beginning of the third condition in a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+2PE	2	6	xhcb	grammar-connect-condition-fact	καὶ	1		Here, **and** indicates the beginning of the third condition in a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 2PE	2	6	ap1j	figs-infostructure	καὶ πόλεις Σοδόμων καὶ Γομόρρας τεφρώσας καταστροφῇ κατέκρινεν	1		If it would be natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “and he condemned the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah to destruction, having reduced them to ashes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 2PE	2	6	gp3e		πόλεις Σοδόμων καὶ Γομόρρας τεφρώσας	1	having reduced the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah to ashes	This phrase indicates the means by which God destroyed Sodom and Gomorrah. Alternate translation: “by means of reducing the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah to ashes”
 2PE	2	6	xi0n	translate-names	Σοδόμων καὶ Γομόρρας	1		**Sodom and Gomorrah** are the names of two cities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	2	6	w1b9	figs-abstractnouns	καταστροφῇ κατέκρινεν	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **destruction** by translating the idea behind it with an verb, such as “destroy.” Alternate translation: “he condemned them to be destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	2	6	hgt7	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὑπόδειγμα μελλόντων ἀσεβέσιν τεθεικώς	1	an example of what is going to happen to the ungodly	This clause indicates the result of what happened in the previous clauses of the verse. God’s destruction of Sodom and Gomorrah resulted in them being an **example** and a warning of what happens to others who disobey God. Alternate translation: “with the result that God set them as an example of the things that will happen to the ungodly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 2PE	2	6	eocy	figs-genericnoun	ἀσεβέσιν	1		Here, **ungodly** refers to wicked people in general, not to one specific wicked person. Alternate translation: “to an ungodly person” or “to ungodly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-2PE	2	7	fm1p	grammar-connect-condition-fact	καὶ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, **and** indicates the beginning of the fourth condition in a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+2PE	2	7	fm1p	grammar-connect-condition-fact	καὶ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, **and** indicates the beginning of the fourth condition in a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 2PE	2	7	zif8	writing-pronouns	ἐρύσατο	1	the behavior of the lawless in their sensuality	Here, **he** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “God rescued” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 2PE	2	7	xjq6	translate-names	Λὼτ	1	Connecting Statement:	**Lot** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2PE	2	7	uknf	figs-distinguish	καταπονούμενον ὑπὸ τῆς τῶν ἀθέσμων ἐν ἀσελγείᾳ ἀναστροφῆς	1	Connecting Statement:	This clause is giving more information about **Lot**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could begin a new sentence here to clarify this. Alternate translation: “He was being oppressed by the behavior of the lawless ones in licentiousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
@@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	2	19	b79v	figs-metaphor	ᾧ γάρ τις ἥττηται, τούτῳ δεδούλωται	1	For by what someone has been overcome, by this he has been enslaved	Peter speaks of a person as being **enslaved** when anything has control over that person, he speaks of that thing as the master of that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this non-figuratively or as a simile. Alternate translation: “For if a person is overpowered by something, that person becomes controlled by that thing” or “For if a person is overpowered by something, that person becomes like a slave to that thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2PE	2	19	xqmy	figs-activepassive	ᾧ γάρ τις ἥττηται, τούτῳ δεδούλωται	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive sentence with an active form. Alternate translation: “For if something overpowers a person, that thing enslaves that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2PE	2	20	v3xc		γὰρ	1		Here, **For** could refer to: (1) another explanation of Peter’s statement “themselves being slaves of destruction” in the previous verse, (2) a transition from what Peter said in the previous verse to what he is going to say in this verse. Here, **For** does not indicate the reason or result of what was said in the previous verse. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “And”
-2PE	2	20	q96i	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ…ἀποφυγόντες τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου, ἐν ἐπιγνώσει τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, τούτοις δὲ πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες ἡττῶνται, γέγονεν αὐτοῖς τὰ ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων	1		Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “they have escaped the impurities of the world through the knowledge of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ, but having become entangled and overcome by them again, the last has become worse for them than the first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+2PE	2	20	q96i	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ…ἀποφυγόντες τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου, ἐν ἐπιγνώσει τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, τούτοις δὲ πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες ἡττῶνται, γέγονεν αὐτοῖς τὰ ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων	1		Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “they have escaped the impurities of the world through the knowledge of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ, but having become entangled and overcome by them again, the last has become worse for them than the first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 2PE	2	20	efnj	figs-metaphor	εἰ…ἀποφυγόντες τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου	1		Using a similar metaphor to that in [2:18](../02/18.md), here Peter speaks of believers as if they had been slaves to the **defilements** of the world and have **escaped** that captivity. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “if they have ceased living in the defiling manner of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2PE	2	20	xpo9	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου	1		If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **defilements** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the things that sinful human society does to defile itself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2PE	2	20	lu22	figs-metonymy	τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου	1	the impurities of the world	Here, the **world** refers to human society, which has been corrupted by sin. Alternate translation: “the defiling practices of sinful human society” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

en_tn_63-1JN.tsv

@@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	2	28	d4ql	figs-synecdoche	μὴ αἰσχυνθῶμεν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	may not be put to shame by him	John is using the word **him**, meaning Jesus, to mean the presence of Jesus. Alternate translation: “we will not be ashamed to be in his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 1JN	2	28	j145	figs-activepassive	μὴ αἰσχυνθῶμεν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	may not be put to shame by him	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “we will not be ashamed to be in his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1JN	2	28	x7ic		ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ αὐτοῦ	1	at his coming	Alternate translation: “when he returns to earth”
-1JN	2	29	j146	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν εἰδῆτε ὅτι δίκαιός ἐστιν	1	If you know that he is righteous	John is using the form of conditional possibility here, but he is stating something that is actually true. In Greek, this was a way of affirming that the part that follows this statement is also true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you know that God is righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1JN	2	29	j146	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν εἰδῆτε ὅτι δίκαιός ἐστιν	1	If you know that he is righteous	John is using the form of conditional possibility here, but he is stating something that is actually true. In Greek, this was a way of affirming that the part that follows this statement is also true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what John is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you know that God is righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1JN	2	29	j147	writing-pronouns	ἐστιν…αὐτοῦ	1	he is … him	The pronouns **he** and **him** likely refer to God the Father, since in the next two verses John says that believers are “children of God,” and he speaks in this verse of those who have **been begotten from him**. Alternate translation: “God is … God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	2	29	j148	figs-abstractnouns	πᾶς ὁ ποιῶν τὴν δικαιοσύνην	1	everyone who does righteousness	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **righteousness** with an adjective such as “right.” Alternate translation: “everyone who does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1JN	2	29	u6er	figs-activepassive	πᾶς ὁ ποιῶν τὴν δικαιοσύνην ἐξ αὐτοῦ γεγέννηται	1	everyone who does righteousness has been begotten from him	If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God is the father of everyone who does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -481,9 +481,9 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	4	10	j274	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Υἱὸν αὐτοῦ	1	his Son	**Son** is an important title for Jesus. Alternate translation: “his Son Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 1JN	4	10	b39j	figs-abstractnouns	ἀπέστειλεν τὸν Υἱὸν αὐτοῦ, ἱλασμὸν περὶ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν	1	sent his Son as the propitiation for our sins	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **propitiation** by stating the meaning behind it with an equivalent expression. See how you translated the term in [2:2](../02/02.md). Alternate translation: “sent his Son to be the offering that made him no longer angry with us because of our sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1JN	4	11	i4tf	figs-nominaladj	ἀγαπητοί	1	Beloved	See how you translated **Beloved** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “You people whom I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-1JN	4	11	g4gu	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς ἠγάπησεν ἡμᾶς	1	if God thus loved us	John is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because God loved us in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1JN	4	11	g4gu	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς ἠγάπησεν ἡμᾶς	1	if God thus loved us	John is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what John is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because God loved us in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1JN	4	11	dy86	grammar-connect-condition-fact	οὕτως	1		The word **thus** refers to the manner in which God showed his love to us, as described in verses 9 and 10. Alternate translation: “in that way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
-1JN	4	12	j275	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν ἀγαπῶμεν ἀλλήλους, ὁ Θεὸς ἐν ἡμῖν μένει, καὶ ἡ ἀγάπη αὐτοῦ τετελειωμένη ἐν ἡμῖν ἐστιν	1	If we love one another, God remains in us, and his love is perfected in us	John is speaking of a real situation as if it were a hypothetical condition. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is already real, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not real, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “But as we love each other, God remains in us, and his love is perfected in us” or “But we do love each other, so that means that God remains in us, and his love is perfected in us”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1JN	4	12	j275	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν ἀγαπῶμεν ἀλλήλους, ὁ Θεὸς ἐν ἡμῖν μένει, καὶ ἡ ἀγάπη αὐτοῦ τετελειωμένη ἐν ἡμῖν ἐστιν	1	If we love one another, God remains in us, and his love is perfected in us	John is speaking of a real situation as if it were a hypothetical condition. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is already real, and if your readers might  that what John is saying is not real, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “But as we love each other, God remains in us, and his love is perfected in us” or “But we do love each other, so that means that God remains in us, and his love is perfected in us”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1JN	4	12	sh9q	figs-metaphor	ὁ Θεὸς ἐν ἡμῖν μένει	1	God remains in us	See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. In this instance, it seems to mean the same thing as in [2:6](../02/06.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “God continues to have a close relationship with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1JN	4	12	vt14	figs-activepassive	ἡ ἀγάπη αὐτοῦ τετελειωμένη ἐν ἡμῖν ἐστιν	1	his love is perfected in us	See how you translated the similar expression in [2:5](../02/05.md). In this case, it is clear that John is referring to God’s love for us, rather than to our love for God. Alternate translation: “God’s love has achieved its purpose in our lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1JN	4	13	gj7p		ἐν τούτῳ γινώσκομεν ὅτι ἐν αὐτῷ μένομεν, καὶ αὐτὸς ἐν ἡμῖν, ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ Πνεύματος αὐτοῦ δέδωκεν ἡμῖν	1	In this we know that we remain in him and he in us: that he has given us of his Spirit	This verse is very similar to the second half of [3:24](../03/24.md). See how you translated that verse. **In this** may set up an awkward sentence in your language. If so, try wording it in other ways. Alternate translation: “This is how we know that we remain in him, and he in us: He has given us of his Spirit” or “We know that we remain in him, and he in us, because he has given us of his Spirit”
@@ -574,7 +574,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	5	7	qpab	figs-personification	οἱ μαρτυροῦντες	1		Here, John speaks of water and blood as though they were people who could **testify**, or speak about what they saw. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “ways that God has given us to know that he sent Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 1JN	5	8	j320	figs-metonymy	τὸ ὕδωρ, καὶ τὸ αἷμα	1	the water and the blood	See how you decided to translate the terms **water** and **blood** in [5:6](../05/06.md). Alternate translation: (1) “the baptism of Jesus and his death on the cross” or (2) “the birth of Jesus and his death on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1JN	5	8	j321	figs-idiom	οἱ τρεῖς εἰς τὸ ἕν εἰσιν	1	the three are unto the one	This is an idiom. If this does not communicate well in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “these three all say the same thing” or “these three all agree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1JN	5	9	j322	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ τὴν μαρτυρίαν τῶν ἀνθρώπων λαμβάνομεν	1	If we receive the testimony of men	John is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something this way if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since we receive the testimony of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1JN	5	9	j322	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ τὴν μαρτυρίαν τῶν ἀνθρώπων λαμβάνομεν	1	If we receive the testimony of men	John is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something this way if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what John is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since we receive the testimony of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1JN	5	9	ai6a	figs-idiom	τὴν μαρτυρίαν τῶν ἀνθρώπων λαμβάνομεν	1	we receive the testimony of men	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “we believe people when they give testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1JN	5	9	j323	figs-gendernotations	τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	of men	Although the term **men** is masculine, John is using the word in a generic sense that could include both men and women. Alternate translation: “of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 1JN	5	9	k2de	figs-explicit	ἡ μαρτυρία τοῦ Θεοῦ μείζων ἐστίν	1	the testimony of God is greater	The word **greater** implicitly means that the testimony of God is more reliable than human testimony, since God knows everything and God always tells the truth. Alternate translation: “the testimony of God is more reliable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -608,7 +608,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1JN	5	14	j333	writing-pronouns	αὐτόν…αὐτοῦ…ἀκούει	1	him … his … he listens	The pronouns **him**, **his**, and **he** refer to God in this verse. Consider whether it might be helpful to your readers or more natural in your language to use the name “God” in one or more of these instances. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 1JN	5	14	at5n		ἐάν τι αἰτώμεθα κατὰ τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ	1	if we ask anything according to his will	Alternate translation: “if we ask for the things that God wants for us”
 1JN	5	14	j334	figs-idiom	ἀκούει ἡμῶν	1	he listens to us	As in [4:5](../04/05.md), the word **listens** is an idiom. However, the meaning here is different than the meaning there, which was, “is persuaded by.” Rather, here it refers to God being willing to grant what we ask. Alternate translation: “he is willing to give it to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1JN	5	15	j335	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν οἴδαμεν ὅτι ἀκούει ἡμῶν	1	if we know that he listens to us	John is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a possibility if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since we know that he listens to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+1JN	5	15	j335	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν οἴδαμεν ὅτι ἀκούει ἡμῶν	1	if we know that he listens to us	John is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a possibility if it is certain or true, and if your readers might  that what John is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since we know that he listens to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 1JN	5	15	j336	figs-idiom	ἀκούει ἡμῶν	1	he listens to us	As in [5:14](../05/14.md), the word **listens** is an idiom. See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “he is willing to give us what we ask for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1JN	5	15	j337	figs-explicit	ἀκούει ἡμῶν	1	he listens to us	It may be helpful to repeat the condition that John specifies in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “he is disposed to give us what we ask for if it is according to his will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1JN	5	15	j338	writing-pronouns	ἀκούει…αὐτοῦ	1	he listens … him	The pronouns **he** and **him** refer to God in this verse. Consider whether it might be more natural in your language to use the name “God” for **he** and to say **him** later in the verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])